Home

DeskPack Advanced 14.1 User Manual

1. PH 282 14 1 Walcome ta VOW m EAE 282 14 2 Define Press Settings sse eene nnne retain iiir einn 282 14 2 1 The Default Press Settings sse nnne nini 282 14 2 2 Creating a Press Setting sss eene nennen nnn 283 14 2 3 Copying a Press Setting sss eee nen nennen nre 283 14 2 4 Editing amp Press 5S UNG errnit TUNI MN UID 283 14 2 5 DEST Gra FESS OPI oan cousi earanrer Int UAR A DeC PLN MOTO DI E 283 14 2 6 Choosing a Press Setting eesuseiruns oii On idt nn a t PAS Ua ou MER UD ESL noua E 284 Contents 14 2 7 Tie Press Setundsn Detalierea a N nd Cata ston DR E RR Rd R 284 14 5 Generate the PEeVIBW damen ttti bon ertet t aatia von t bu unti ocn orla dcos 285 14 3 1 Navigating in the Preview eene 286 144 The Viewer WINGO Wanene So tiec potoit iere eed de E ava ost Maude ib inten bee i otto NecdaT 287 Teal VIEWING ODUON Sarte TUUM 287 14 4 2 SSO AN AUN OILS enar T aan tlw cb eee E R 289 14 4 3 Total Area COV ETAGC uceiesedetores bebe a dondex et aed mtsent betur a pede bel due er aa CS Qeon a 290 1444 Flexo TPAC M Om 291 14A FEO PADU nanain een cee ree re errr 292 1446 Registration EO che ecard ens de dabo P adorent td PN ey a 293 ge Aad Sts lt 0 eoe tentia ettet tud MM IUUD pO UM I CUM mper 294 14 2 5 MolreDetecllOPus ida Ir iq aq beoe ripeto imam ubere ta ini usate atio d ou tace Dune aad
2. ESKOOG Insert Field Job Automation Engine Links Product Automation Engine System Show Local Variables Hd Category Field Barcodes File Name Date amp Time Fonts Document Layer Names File Info XMP CMYK Profile Inks RGB Profile Color Mode Trim Box Media Box Art Rnx DeskPack Advanced name Format name ext kA mm m path name ext Custom _ Repeat format for all items i F Cancel Separator Comma Preview DocumentinfoPanel ai Tip Hover over 9 to get more information about the different formats Defining a Custom Format To define your own field format 1 Choose Custom in the format list 2 Define your format in the box below using the predefined formats and the information under a for help 208 DeskPack Advanced Insert Field Show Local Variables HH Category Field ae ae Illustrator Version inuidia Creative Suite Version eigo OS Type File Info XMP EE Lem Inks Short User Name Job Automation Engine Full User Name Links Hd Product Automation Engine 4 System Forma Custom mm P Illustrator major minor build Repeat format for all items lt Separator Comma Preview Illustrator 15 0 0 Note e The items in square brackets like major are dynamic the rest of the text is static e Use the Enter key to get a new line 3 Check how your format resolves for the current file in
3. GS1 DataBar Truncated formerly RSS Limited is similar to GS1 DataBar but the height of its bars is truncated It encodes Global Trade Item Numbers in a smaller symbol for use on small items It cannot be scanned omnidirectionally g0000000 Parameters General Parameters e Rotation on page 170 e Code on page 170 e Composite Component on page 171 Text Parameters e Add Human Readable Characters on page 171 e Puton Top on page 172 e Multiple Text Lines on page 172 e Font Family Style and Size on page 172 e Alignment on page 173 e Vertical Offset on page 173 Additional Parameters e Bar Width Reduction on page 174 e Device Compensation on page 174 e Narrow Bar on page 177 145 ESKO NEM 146 e Snap Bars to Output Resolution on page 178 GS1 DataBar Expanded About this Barcode GS1 DataBar Expanded formerly RSS Expanded encodes regular barcode data primary item identification data and Application Identifiers It can encode alphanumeric characters This barcode can be scanned omnidirectionally by suitably programmed slot scanners I iN w CDO1IJ00000000000000 Parameters General Parameters e Rotation on page 170 e Code on page 170 e Composite Component on page 171 Text Parameters e Add Human Readable Characters on page 171 e Puton Top on page 172 e Multiple Text Lines on page 172 e Font Family Style and Size on page 172 e Alignment on page 173 e Vertical Offset on pag
4. Minimum Object size will report a problem if objects are found that have a bounding box that is smaller than the specified value in horizontal and or vertical direction The unit of measurement is adapted from the current settings in the Illustrator Units amp Undo Preferences 261 12 S K O X DeskPack Advanced Maximum Total Density will report a problem if the total sum of color components of a color exceeds the specified value Color is Negative determines the total sum of percentages of ink components that still determine whether a color is negative if the sum is below the specified value the color is regarded as negative Check for Non Printing Layers will report a problem if a layer is non printable Note A known limitation Assume the check parameters are set as follows min 396 max 97 96 assume that you have a gradient from 096 to 9796 This gradient will not be flagged as wrong even though the minima are not respected This is because white 096 is always ignored and because Preflight for Illustrator does not check in between stops it only checks the actual stops in this case 096 and 97 12 4 6 Parameter options 262 When the Parameters Tab is active clicking the arrow in the top right corner of the window folds out a management menu for Parameter sets Parameters Open Choose a Parameter Set Corrugated Postprint Lot Flexo Flexible Packagi a Flexo Folding Cartons Flexo Labels Gravur
5. Fit In Window N Cancel JA OK Hide New Lines 5 In this dialog you can select the lines you would like to remove It will not be possible to select the new lines You can choose to hide the new lines by enabling Hide New Lines 6 Click and drag a rectangle around the original cutout window This window will be grayed out This means that it will be removed in the final ARD file 3 LDeskPack Advanced Export Selected Objects to ArtiosCAD File Click a line to remove or restore it Fit In Window Press spacebar 3 and click to zoom in Press spacebar X and click to zoom out Press spacebar and drag to pan M Hide New Lines Cancel OK 7 Click OK This bring you back to the Export Selected Objects to ArtiosCAD File dialog In the preview window you notice that the original cutout has been removed 53 3 DeskPack Advanced Preview ArtiosCAD File Save selected objects in Main Design Layer 3 Annotation layers based on Adobe Illustrator layers Layers based on ArtiosCad Line Type swatches Ivi Include a copy of carrier cutout ard Board information and graphics layers are not copied Rebuilding the design will nnt be possible Remove Lines vi Place this ArtiosCAD file in the document The current Artios CAD file will be replaced by this saved file M Highlight Selection 8 Click Save As 9 Specify a file name in the Save As dialog The software suggests the name o
6. Cyan 80 7 Magenta 80 8 Yellow 7 6 Black 0 396 e Find Best Match will scan the selected Ink Book and list the inks with the lowest dE compared to the ink you want to replace At the bottom the New and the Current ink are shown side by side Replace Selected Color by Find Best Match Ink Book FJ PANTONE Solid Uncoated dE Formula CIELAB Delta E Classic e Replace by Color from Ink Book allows to replace the ink by a new ink from an Ink book Selecting the Ink is done in the same way as adding a new ink from Ink Book see Adding an ink from Ink Book on page 105 108 DeskPack Advanced E Replace Selected Color by Color from Ink Book v Page 1 Yellow Purple Yellow 0131 Yellow 012 Violet Red 0331 Orange 021 Blue 072 Magenta 0521 4 Define if you want to replace the ink for every object including images or if you want to exclude images from the replacing by setting the Include images option Obviously if you exclude images the replaced ink will remain in the list of used inks 5 Click the Replace Ink button Note If one or more objects can t be converted a description of the problem will appear in the Messages dialog and the converted ink will not disappear from the list of used inks in the Ink Manager 6 5 Color Engine Plugin Preferences The Color Engine Plugin Preferences can be opened from Illustrator Preferences Esko Color Engine Preferences If Use Swatch Grou
7. E EA EE E E EEA EEEE AEE S ee 104 onu GOP VIGNE NONG RERO TH 104 2 igiisoolb eifen RP 105 6 3 Adding an mic Tom dn BOOK ode t e o eR us tUe Re Os toten adeat potu en toda 105 oye rice ce el ale Ec RI OO E 107 6 5 Color Engine Plugin Pr tererioeS ret ui oi eere ed e ted rect ive v den este ort unn eta id 109 6 6 Pantoriet IDK DOO Seg porte qur pee ttov ote tee p pm t tacta tA MER MANN LONE LoR Een 109 Dynamic Barcodes o ia didt EO UNI sar eh A cence ek E ucc tod t 110 E KSOPV MAGE NOBUGEm aiam tede at us da falto ne Lon oaa bl ox p oe buon Ai cn aate Ces dla f Este 110 1 2 What Sd Dar Code Zumaia eet tides o ot om P donata ost as buche aue Duc nr dco 111 7 3 Getting Started with Dynamic Barcodes sss 111 a E S K O x DeskPack Advanced 7 4 Using Dynamic Barcodes in Unlicensed Mode sss mene nennen 113 Fo ONO BICOS Ba cO OO 113 6o T Greaund a BI OOE ara teen tet E E Rp I E A eee eee 114 5 2 Editing a Barcode T mmm 117 7 5 3 Setting Barcode Parameters to Default eene 117 1 5 4 Barcode Placenoldefs ssqiisihidtetieitutateda as GR RR bain ruit Bot sederet QAI Ad 118 7 6 Dynamic Barcodes Advanced sse enne inni 122 7 6 1 Choosing a Font Standard seen nee ener nennen 122 7 6 2 Using Dynamic Content with Dynamic Barcodes seen 123 0 3 DAC OCG VOLS olio gm 123 7 6 4 Exporting Documents with Barcodes sss eee nennen nenn
8. 1 Select a Page Box in the list Its details will be shown in the bottom part of the dialog 2 Enable or disable the specific page box by enabling the Set Box option 3 Enter the offset width and heigth You can click the button to swap width and height In the Size dropdown you can select any of the preset sizes 4 Click one of the Fit to buttons to fit the selected page box respectively to the ArtBoard Artwork Selection or CAD 5 Use the Show All Page Boxes to show or hide all Page Boxes in your job 59 ESKO NEM ALL PAGE BOXES Media Box 0 mm mm 355 mm 355 mm 1 Crop Box Trim Box 5 mm 5 mm 35 mm 200 mm Art Box Details Trim Box 2 V Set Trim Box gc E 4 Ci ea oS 5 vi Show All Page Boxes 3 7 The Inspection Setup Plug In CO The Inspection Setup Plug In allows you to define Inspection points or Inspection boxes in your job For each of these Inspection points you will see the Lab value and DeltaE For every Inspection box you can set the Profile Inspection points and boxes will be exported e g to be used in an Inspection System in inline presses This Inspection System will warn if the values measured at a specific position are more different from the entered Lab values than the allowed deltaE or if the Inspection box or Dynamic Art box doesn t match the defined profile The plug in consists of e the Inspection Setup tool under the Eyedropper tool in th
9. 100 Attention Choose a fill color that is e a process or a spot color other colors might generate trapping problems e nottoo light or the barcode might be difficult to scan 3 In the Dynamic Barcodes dialog select your Barcode Type 114 DDeskPack Advanced 4 Enter a Rotation angle for your barcode or use one of the rotation buttons Choose the Orientation of your barcode using one of the buttons or by entering an angle 5 Enter the barcode s data in the Code field For most barcodes you can choose to also show this data as a human readable number T Attention Make sure the barcode data you enter is valid for the barcode type you chose If it isn t a warning error will pop up Messages X e 13 or 15 or 18 digits required Dynamic Barcodes 16 05 24 e 13 or 15 or 18 digits required Dynamic Barcodes 15 05 24 checkdigit s Dynamic Barcodes 16 18 75 4 C correct code is lt 1234567890128 Dynamic Barcodes 16 18 25 Show All 6 To fill in other parameters specific to the barcode type you chose open the Additional parameters section and see Barcode Types on page 133 115 f f 116 Dynamic Barcodes Barcode Tye n E Text parameters wv Add Human Readable Characters v Light Margin Indicator lt gt Font Family default font Font Style Size EE 12 pt Vertical Offset C 0 mm 7 Additional parameters Bar Width Reduction Device Compensation
10. 15 ESKO LDeskPack Advanced 15 White Underprint 15 1 Copyright Notice 304 Copyright 2015 Esko Software BVBA Gent Belgium All rights reserved This material information and instructions for use contained herein are the property of Esko Software BVBA The material information and instructions are provided on an AS IS basis without warranty of any kind There are no warranties granted or extended by this document Furthermore Esko Software BVBA does not warrant guarantee or make any representations regarding the use or the results of the use of the software or the information contained herein Esko Software BVBA shall not be liable for any direct indirect consequential or incidental damages arising out of the use or inability to use the software or the information contained herein The information contained herein is subject to change without notice Revisions may be issued from time to time to advise of such changes and or additions No part of this document may be reproduced stored in a data base or retrieval system or published in any form or in any way electronically mechanically by print photoprint microfilm or any other means without prior written permission from Esko Software BVBA This document supersedes all previous dated versions PANTONE PantoneLIVE and other Pantone trademarks are the property of Pantone LLC All other trademarks or registered trademarks are the property of their respective own
11. 401 Global Identification Number for N3 X 30 FNC1 Consignment GINC 402 Global Shipment Identification Number N3 N1 7 FNC1 GSIN 403 Routing Code N3 X 30 FNC1 410 Ship to Deliver to Global Location Number N3 N13 411 Bill to Invoice to Global Location Number N8 N13 412 Purchased from Global Location Number N3 N13 413 Ship for Deliver for Forward to Global N3 N13 Location Number 414 Identification of a Physical Location Global N38 N13 Location Number 131 132 415 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 421 7001 7002 7003 7004 7005 7006 7007 7008 7009 7010 703s 710 711 712 713 8001 8002 8003 8004 8005 8006 8007 8008 8010 8011 Global Location Number of the Invoicing Party Ship to Deliver to Postal Code Within a Single Postal Authority Ship to Deliver to Postal Code with ISO Country Code Country of Origin of a Trade Item Country of Initial Processing Country of Processing Country of Disassembly Country Covering full Process Chain Country Subdivision of Origin NATO Stock Number NSN UN ECE Meat Carcasses and Cuts Classification Expiration Date and Time Active Potency Catch Area First Freeze Date Harvest Date Species for Fishery Purposes Fishing Gear Type Production Method LDeskPack Advanced N34N13 N3 X 20 N3 N3 X 9 N3 N3 N3 N3 4 N 12 N3 N3 N3 N3 N3 N3 N3 X 3 N4 N13 N4 X 30 N4 N10 N4 N 4 N4 X 12 N4 N6 N4 N6 12 N4
12. 8 5 3 Delete Mark Set To delete a Mark Set select Delete Mark Set in the Fly out menu of the Dynamic Marks palette The Mark Set including all Dynamic Marks will be removed from the file Note This does not remove a saved and loaded Mark Set from disk To do so select Manage Mark Sets from the Fly out menu See Manage Mark Sets on page 215 8 5 4 Manage Mark Sets To manage your Mark Sets 1 In the Fly out menu of the Dynamic Marks palette select Manage Mark Sets 215 DDeskPack Advanced Manage Dynamic Mark Set Mark Set Rename E New Mark Set TestSet Delete The Manage Dynamic Mark Set dialog will show the Mark Sets saved at the location defined in the Dynamic Mark Preferences See Dynamic Marks Preferences on page 216 Note Since Mark Sets are regular ai documents the list will show all Adobe lllustrator files at the defined location 2 Select a Mark Set from the list and e Click Rename enter a new name for the Mark Set and click Rename to change the name of the Mark Set e Click Delete to remove the Mark Set from the list The actual Illustrator file will be deleted This can not be undone 8 5 5 Export Mark Sets This option can only be used in combination with a DFE Server 8 5 6 Dynamic Marks Preferences You can open the Dynamic Marks Preferences by choosing Illustrator gt Preferences gt Esko gt Dynamic Marks Preferences on Mac or Edit gt Preferences gt Esko gt Dynamic
13. Au zn s E 367 im a ie v E Ls Is B 207 450 0 x 450 0 mm 14 6 2 Navigating the Viewer Compare window The Viewer Compare window contains different ways to navigate The Inspect tools e The Zoom tool Under the zoom tool you find e Zoom out e Fit document in view e Fit document width height e Zoomto 1 1 view Show Zoom Options showing all these options as individual buttons 298 DeskPack Advanced e he Zoom out tool e The Pan tool The Navigator By dragging the red rectangle when zoomed in you can navigate through the job The View options The View options allow to go back to the previous view or use additional settings such as rotate invert or mirror the view 14 6 3 Compare modes Using the Compare butons you can choose different Compare modes views Compare C qw 5 m f e View Current version only e View Reference version only e View Both documents on top of each other Additional options 299 IBj ESKO LDeskPack Advanced e View Both in their original colors e View Both Show difference the differences will be shown in the Added and Substracted highlight colors e View Both highlight difference same as above but the identical parts are dimmed e View Both only difference same as above but the identical parts are hidden e Change Added Highlight Color Change Substracted Highlight Color and Change Both Hig
14. DeskPack Advanced f Barcode lyoes and Parameters 7 7 1 Supported Barcode Types General Purpose Barcodes Code 39 e DataMatrix 2 of 5 e QR Interleaved 2 of 5 e MicroQR Codabar Code 128 Code 128 long MSI Retail Barcodes e EAN 13 e GS1 DataMatrix e EAN 8 e UPC A e UPC E e 351 DataBar Omnidirectional e GS1 DataBar Truncated e S1 DataBar Stacked e 3S1 DataBar Stacked Omnidirectional e GS1 DataBar Limited e GS1 DataBar Expanded e GS1 DataBar Expanded Stacked Ter 128 DeskPack Advanced GS1 128 GS1 U S Coupon Interim M S 7 Marks amp Spencer Sick Pharmaceutical Healthcare and Cosmetic Barcodes NDC HRI Laetus Pharma Code CLF 8 HIBC 39 HIBC 128 Paraf Italy PZN PZN8 Shipment Container Barcodes ITF 14 ITF 16 UPC SCS Identity Document Barcode PDF417 MicroPDF417 DeskPack Advanced GS1 Application Identifiers These are the GS1 Application Indentifiers available in Dynamic Barcodes Al Data Content Format FNC1 Required 0 Serial Shipping Container Code SSCC N2 N18 1 Global Trade Item Number GTIN N2 N14 2 GTIN of Contained Trade Items N2 N14 10 Batch or Lot Number N2 X 20 FNC1 11 Production Date YYMMDD N24 N6 12 Due Date YYMMDD N24 N6 13 Packaging Date YYMMDD N2 N6 15 Best Before Date YYMMDD N2 N6 16 Sell By Date YYMMDD N2 N6 17 Expiration Date YYMMDD N2 N6 20 Variant Number N2
15. If you click Save As the Save As dialog opens eo Save As Save As Nose Clip box 125 kraft_copy ard fa 4 e OO Structural Designs Q search DEVICES Name M99 Date Modified Can 330ml zae Thursday 23 April 2009 10 11 SHARED Thursday 23 April 2009 10 11 PLACES Friday 16 January 2009 15 50 Desktop Thursday 28 May 2009 11 19 J Applications Monday 15 May 2006 17 03 SX cla Monday 26 November 2001 16 55 d Monday 29 September 2008 13 32 kraft ARD Yesterday 16 57 90 vim Wednesday 3 July 2002 09 49 Monday 3 August 2009 19 11 New Folder Cancel C Save If you have an ArtiosCAD file loaded in your Illustrator document the software suggests as file name the name of the loaded ArtiosCAD file followed by copy We recommend you not to overwrite the original ARD file as some functionality of the ARD file will be lost graphics layers are not copied and it will not be possible to rebuild the created ARD file and text will be contourized Note Placed EPS objects and or pixel based objects cannot be copied to an ARD file The fill color of the selected contours is not maintained in ArtiosCAD Rather the stroke color of the contour determines the line type in ArtiosCAD If the selected contour is in the Main Design layer the pointage of the contour will be 2 In all other cases the pointage will be O ArtiosCAD Copy to Clipboard Note This function is only available on PC De
16. If you open or place structural design files created by older versions of e g ArtiosCAD 7 3 the structural design layer names might be visualized incorrectly In the picture below the and u in bemaBung are not visualized correctly DDeskPack Advanced j Bemai ing j Main Design _ Layer 1 This happens when the layer name that was saved in the structural design file used a different text encoding than the one that is used to visualize the layer name in Illustrator As structural design files created by older versions of e g ArtiosCAD lt 7 3 do not contain the used text encoding the plug in can only guess which text encoding was used It will by default take the current language settings This should yield the correct result unless you are for example trying to open a German structural design file on a Chinese system If this is the case you can overrule the text encoding in Illustrator gt Preferences gt Esko gt Structural Design Preferences on MAC or File gt Preferences gt Esko gt Structural Design Preferences on PC Structural Design Preferences ArtiosCAD Import Text Encoding From ArtiosCAD file Current language settings Q Other Western European Windows Latin 1 L Cancel ox From ArtiosCAD file ARD files written from ArtiosCAD 7 3 onwards will contain the text encoding used for layer names So for those files the layer browser in Illustrator will always visualize the struct
17. Separations shown in Viewer may differ from the final output when an alternative workflow is used Basic concepts Viewer works with Press Settings The Press Settings allow you to define press specific characteristics such as the first printable dot dot gain dot gain curves and more After defining your Press Settings you can generate an accurate separation preview In this preview you have access to advanced tools such as the Densitometer TAC Limit Preview Plate Preview Print Preview and Registration Error Preview Define Press Settings Before you can start working with Viewer in a meaningful way you should define your Press Settings Without basic information on the properties of the press you are using Viewer cannot simulate accurately You can open the Press Settings window by selecting Press Settings in the fly out menu 14 2 1 The Default Press Settings 22 If no Press Settings Folder is defined in the Viewer Preferences a fixed setting will be used and you will not be able to change or create Press Settings See Viewer Preferences on page 295 In the list of Press Settings there is always one Press Setting called Default which you can edit but not delete DeskPack Advanced You can select it by selecting it in the Press dropdown in the Viewer dialog and edit it using Press Settings in the fly out menu 14 2 2 Creating a Press Setting To create a Press Setting in Viewer Select Press Settings
18. i In the Choose from dropdown select the Ink Book you want to select a color from Select the ink you want to add e by clicking the ink patch in the dialog e by entering its name or part of its name in the Search field By clicking the triangle button next to the search field you can go to the next search result Click the Add button or double click the ink patch to add the selected ink to the Swatches Repeat step 2 3 and 4 to add additional inks Click Done to close the dialog The added inks will be in the Illustrator Swatches Spot colors added from an inkbook will follow the Illutrator Spot Color options which can be found in the fly out menu of the Swatches palette So you define to use LAB or CMYK values BEFORE adding the ink Note If you add an Ink Book or add an Ink to an Ink Book in Color Engine these will only be available after restarting Illustrator If the Use Swatch Group option in the Color Engine Plugin Preferences is enabled an Ink added from an Ink book will be placed in a Group in the Illustrator Swatches The Group will have the same name as the Ink book Note DDeskPack Advanced SWATCHES Y j PANTONE Colors Coated If you try to add an Ink that already exists in the Swatches you will get the choice to update the Ink in the Swatch List using the parameters from the Ink Book or leave the ink as is 6 4 Replacing an Ink To replace an Ink 1 Open the Replace Ink by dialog e
19. lo Magnification eight Snap Bars to Output Resolution 2540 ppi Bax Top H0 mm A Left H0 mm Bottom mm Right 0 mm Get Properties from Job Setup 7 Click the Create button DDeskPack Advanced e f you have the boostX plug in installed Dynamic Barcodes generates your barcode at the intersection of the boostX crosshair e f you don t have the boostX plug in installed Dynamic Barcodes generates your barcode in the center of the view DeskPack Advanced 7 5 2 Editing a Barcode With Dynamic Barcodes you can also edit existing barcodes 1 Open the Dynamic Barcodes 2 Select the barcode to edit in your Illustrator document 3 Change its parameters as you wish in the Dynamic Barcodes dialog Note If you change the Barcode Type and the previous Code is not valid for this barcode type Dynamic Barcodes will reset it to the first default code for this barcode type This is the default code used for placeholder barcodes you can see it in the preset barcodes dialog see Previewing and Creating a Barcode Placeholder on page 120 You can then either e enter your own valid code e use this default code to create a placeholder barcode see Creating a Barcode Placeholder Quickly on page 118 4 Click the Apply button to apply your changes to the barcode 7 5 3 Setting Barcode Parameters to Default To reset all the parameters of the selected barcode to defau
20. will create a Collection of all occurrences showing all locations where parts of objects are thinner than the entered Threshold Note Keep in mind that strokes are NOT considered Note Patterns are not supported Objects with patterns might cause unexpected results when using the Thin Parts functions The Collection palette will open so you can browse through all occurences found See Collection on page 79 for more information on using a Collection Be aware that the Collection generated by Thin Parts unlike normal collections does NOT contain any real objects Instead it contains occurences virtual outlines of places where objects are thinner than the entered Threshold possibly including the suggested fix In the example underneath you can see that at the ends the lines around the logo are smaller than the Threshold The red virtual objects show the suggested fix 211 12 DeskPack Advanced Note Since the Collection doesn t contain real objects the Select option is disabled in the Collection palette 12 8 1 Fixing all Thin Parts You can use the Thin Parts function to automatically create fixes 1 Open the Thin Parts palette enter the desired Threshold and click Collect 2 In the Collect palette browse through the Thin Parts and check the suggested fixes 3 Inthe Thin Parts palette click the Fix All button The Fix All Thin Parts function will create objects as shown in the Collection immediately on
21. 128 long E E E Bar Width Reduction 1 CODE 39 E E gt Text parameters Device Compensation DATAMATRIX Height As soon as you select one of the barcode types defined in the Job Setup all parameters that are defined in the job setup will be entered and no longer be editable indicated by the same green icon 184 DeskPack Advanced Diantic Barcodes gt Text parameters 7 Additional parameters bar Width Reduction Height Narrow Bar Snap Bars to Output Resolution v Get Properties from Job Setup In the example above only the Code is defined in the Job Setup All other parameters can be entered freely 7 8 4 Updating barcode parameters from Job Setup If a barcode is connected to the Job Setup any changes to the barcode parameters in the Job Setup whether it is a changed parameter or a newly added parameter will automatically and immediately be taken into account in Dynamic Barcodes When opening a file all barcodes with the Get Properties from Job Setup option enabled will be updated automatically If a barcode type is removed from the Job Setup the corresponding barcodes in the job will no longer be connected so the Get Properties from Job Setup option is disabled A barcode will also be disconnected and the Get Properties from Job Setup option will be disabled in case the barcode parameters in the Job Setup
22. 295 14 4 9 Technical inks in Viewer sss eee enne ener enn 295 14 5 Viewer Preferent oS aie eade edite toutes buta ede aa i eee hl naa reta rari oras 295 1456 Vew Compare TOO eane ien stint ete t bad fcd fca t d eta ios Las einen Ett duca tr EUROPE 296 14 6 1 The Viewer Compare windoOwW ssssseee e nen nennen nennen 297 14 6 2 Navigating the Viewer Compare windoOwW sssss eee mene een nennen 298 14 6 9 Compare ITIOGGSus aetates d vd to voten Be os ED cesta dde tM cuncto buco Ron te 299 p dore fola nns s ere e Hr 300 14 6 5 Viewer Compare Preferences sss nennen neni 302 JE erect m Tem 302 15 White LST ANN Me suadente EDO sade areata aH Eri d siet irn a dd necat Dra pt da un Rd eT 304 19 COLVIN OUI CS es datos pita satu esac Re ae eot d eds tim tati npa Pn tl Ur ir Sn ERR 304 15 2 white Underin E sets antes Dhereadtenivo ENO E o adeunt don trt b a omes 305 15 3 Adding and Removing White Unde rp int cece sissies 306 1S Ae VV IES Und rprint SOUL CSS sata ttr oe vars olea Lr icti ba ened awd devas dept dp Pa er adt d d oe 306 19 9 MV hite DEderpripE Inisssaaso ens etn abut nube er uM f cep ree ee R oe er eee 307 15 6 Include White OD SC US sim ooo neto en e ar eh bag Mos a dtt e a hatc el m tein mida ama n Mv bn 307 Vii ESKO NEM 1 Copyright Notice Copyright 2015 Esko Software BVBA Gent Belgium All rights reserved This material information and instructions for use contained her
23. Acrobat the Acrobat logo Adobe Creative Suite Illustrator InDesign PDF Photoshop PostScript XMP and the Powered by XMP logo are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and or other countries Microsoft and the Microsoft logo are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries SolidWorks is a registered trademark of SolidWorks Corporation DeskPack Advanced Portions of this software are owned by Spatial Corp 1986 2003 All Rights Reserved JDF and the JDF logo are trademarks of the CIP4 Organisation Copyright 2001 The International Cooperation for the Integration of Processes in Prepress Press and Postpress CIP4 All rights reserved The Esko software contains the RSA Data Security Inc MD5 Message Digest Algorithm Java and all Java based trademarks and logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems in the U S and other countries Part of this software uses technology by BestTM Color Technology EFI EFI and Bestcolor are registered trademarks of Electronics For Imaging GmbH in the U S Patent and Trademark Office Contains PowerNest library Copyrighted and Licensed by Alma 2005 2007 All other product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners Correspondence regarding this publication should be forwarded to Esko Software BVBA Kortrijksesteenweg 1095 B 9051 Gent inf
24. Advanced Dynamic Marks Load Mark Set Default Mark Set i d T Panel 1 not converted Manage Mark Sets Add Standard Mark I EUT Lo Wid Open Symbol Library v Show Properties Palette Export Mark Set for Server Keep Legacy Panels Updated Convert Panels to Dynamic Marks e Every text item in the Dynamic Panel is converted to a separate Dynamic Text Mark using the same variables e f possible other panel items with the same color attribute will be grouped and combined in one single mark e The inks used in the Dynamic Panel are replaced by the corresponding Dynamic Marks color e A Dynamic Panel ink will become Dynamic color with mode Only Printing Inks e A Dynamic Panel Technical ink becomes Dynamic color with mode Only Technical Inks e Darkest ink becomes Darkest color e An object using Registration swatch becomes Registration color e Other inks not Dynamic become a static color e The position of converted panels will always be defined relative to the top left corner of the trim box e Panel items that can t be converted into a Dynamic Mark e g a linked image will remain as a panel item while other items are converted A message will be shown 6 8 lips and tricks open a new document create an object to be used as a mark and as soon as I use Add Selected Art as Mark the color of the object changes or disappears Why If you have a document with e g only one rectangle
25. Autodesk Media Entertainment Portions of this software are copyright 91998 2003 Daniel Veillard All rights reserved Portions of this software are copyright 91999 2006 The Botan Project All rights reserved Part of the software embedded in this product is gSOAP software Portions created by gSOAP are Copyright 92001 2004 Robert A van Engelen Genivia inc All rights reserved Portions of this software are copyright 91998 2008 The OpenSSL Project and 1995 1998 Eric Young eayQcryptsoft com All rights reserved This product includes software developed by the Apache Software Foundation http www apache org Adobe the Adobe logo Acrobat the Acrobat logo Adobe Creative Suite Illustrator InDesign PDF Photoshop PostScript XMP and the Powered by XMP logo are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and or other countries Microsoft and the Microsoft logo are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries SolidWorks is a registered trademark of SolidWorks Corporation 4 LDeskPack Advanced Portions of this software are owned by Spatial Corp 1986 2003 All Rights Reserved JDF and the JDF logo are trademarks of the CIP4 Organisation Copyright 2001 The International Cooperation for the Integration of Processes in Prepress Press and Postpress CIP4 All rights reserved The Esko software contains the RSA Data Security
26. Bitmap images 12 4 3 Line The line tab sets parameters for linewidths Min Width for Negative Line will report a problem for negative lines that are thinner than the specified width see How Preflight for Illustrator works for a definition of negative The value for negative color can be defined in the Other tab with the Color is Negative if Percent Below parameter Min Width for Single Ink Line will report a problem for single color lines that are thinner than the specified width single color means that the color of the line only contains one ink component Min Width for Multi Ink Linewill report a problem for multi ink lines that are thinner than the specified width multi ink means that the color of the line contains more than one ink component Warn if Line has More Than 1 Ink will report a problem if the design contains stroked objects where the stroke color contains more than 1 ink Caution Preflight for Illustrator does not take brushstrokes into account 12 4 4 Font The Font tab parameters search your job for fonts that may cause difficulties in printing because their size is too small or some parts of the characters are too small Also text which is perceived as negative will be more difficult to print in the same small sizes as positive characters 209 12 ESKO 260 LDeskPack Advanced Small text built up with more than one ink can be misregistered and as a consequence lo
27. Dynamic Barcodes barcode to a regular Illustrator group art to be able to edit it further but this is not recommended as it will remove the barcode s protection DeskPack Advanced Attention It will then be possible to make modifications that might render the barcode invalid 1 To do this go to Object gt Expand in the Illustrator menu 2 Choose the object s characteristics to expand then click OK Expand a pat oK W Object 00K Iv Fill Cancel Stroke Expand Gradient To _ Gradient Mesh _ Specify 255 Objects This turns your barcode into a regular Illustrator object You can now for example edit each bar of the barcode individually 7 6 4 Exporting Documents with Barcodes If you are using other Esko applications you can export Illustrator documents containing barcodes to the Esko Normalized PDF format preserving the barcodes information and editability Viewing Barcode Information in Other Esko Applications 1 Export your Illustrator document to the Esko Normalized PDF format e fyouhave Automation Engine use Shuttle to launch the document into your chosen workflow This converts it to Normalized PDF automatically Note See the Adobe lllustrator Client documentation for setup information e f you don t have Automation Engine use File Export and choose Normalized PDF as the export format 2 Select in Automation Engine or open in PackEdge Acrobat your docu
28. E Process Cyan 100 Process Magenta gt Process Magenta 100 Process Yellow Process Yellow 100 Process Black B Process Yellow iD PANTONE 187 C lll PANTONE 477 C ES Mask None i Revert z X You can remap an ink to any other ink that e is defined in your document to see all the inks defined in your document go to Window gt Esko Ink Manager e is defined in the swatch list as a spot color you should see a dot in the swatch s lower right corner E Note If you want to remap one of your inks to an ink that is not defined in your document see Creating a New Ink for Remapping on page 98 4 Click the Apply button at the bottom of the palette or click Apply in the fly out menu to apply the remapping to your image You can see that the ink has been remapped in your image Q7 DeskPack Advanced Note To undo the last remapping use Command Z To undo all remappings and get back to the original image click Revert at the bottom of the palette or Reset To Original in the fly out menu 5 5 2 Creating a New Ink for Remapping If your document doesn t contain the ink you want to remap one of your inks to you can create it in Illustrator With your document open go to Illustrator s Swatches palette Define a new spot color swatch as you would normally do in Illustrator Use this swatch to create an object in your document Save your document ah O N Ma
29. Illustrator can be used without any limitations When a font not available to Illustrator is used a substitution is used However the original font name is preserved in the Illustrator document Illustrator gives the following warning in such cases Illustrator PDF Warnings The document contains PDF objects that have been reinterpreted The font Broadway is missing Affected text will be displayed using a substitute font Cancel When such a document is saved and reopened on a system with the font installed it will be correctly rendered without any warning 11 4 8 Linework with mixed DeviceN colors Adobe Illustrator does not support mixing multiple inks combinations of multiple spot inks or process inks and a spot ink in a single fill or stroke Instead they are simulated by multiple fills resp strokes visible in the Appearance palette When PDF Import encounters a path object with a DeviceN fill or stroke it is imported as multiple appearances with additional fills resp strokes put into overprint Such appearances are supported by boostX Ink Mix which can work with them further However the Ink Mix plug in is not needed for this functionality of PDF Import 11 4 9 Linked images PDF Import supports links to external images The links are preserved Some file formats for external images are supported in a Normalized PDF but are not supported by Adobe Illustrator For example multichannel PSD files can be plac
30. Layer When adding a Dynamic Mark for the first time to a document a layer named Dynamic Marks will be created Standard Marks are created in the Dynamic Marks layer Custom Marks are moved to the Dynamic Marks layer If you rename the Dynamic Marks Layer all Dynamic Marks created later will still be created in or moved to this layer already containing dynamic marks Loading a Mark Set If you load a Mark Set the Dynamic Marks in the set will be placed in the same layer as saved in the set This means you can have two different layers containing Dynamic Marks at that point Newly created marks will then be placed in one of those layers Locking or hiding the Dynamic Marks Layer If the Dynamic Marks layer is locked you will not be able to add any mark A message will be shown in the message palette However all indirect operations are possible for example changes in the Ink Manager will change the gradation strip even if the Dynamic Marks Layer is locked If the Dynamic Marks layer is invisible marks will be created moved in the Dynamic Marks layer and will immediately turn invisible o Dynamic Panels in Dynamic Marks When opening a document containing a Dynamic Panel you will see those Dynamic Panels in the Dynamic Marks palette By selecting a Dynamic Info Panel and choosing Convert Panels to Dynamic Marks from the fly out menu you can convert the selected Dynamic Panel into one or more Dynamic Marks 219 DDeskPack
31. Mask Stroke 38 amp ri0 Ink Manager XSF SVG Interactivity v Messages Swatches PowerLayout XCEL Symbols 8F11 PowerTrapper b Transform fF8 Preflight b Transparency r 3 F10 Type b Seamless Repeat XHA Variables Structural Design b Studio Designer b Brush Libraries 7 Studio Toolkit for Boxes P 69 ESKO NEM boost Preferences To open the boostX preferences choose Illustrator gt Preferences gt Esko gt boostX Preferences Please refer to the chapter on Working with Crosshair alignment tools on page 82 for the explanation on the Crosshair Preferences The boostX Tool Layout preference allows you to place the different boostX tools either integrated with the Illustrator tools grouped or as individual tools in the Illustrator tool bar With the boostX Menu Layout preferences you can choose if the boostX menus should appear in menus Object Path Esko and Select Esko Integrated or in Object Filters Esko Single Menu Group boostX Preferences Crosshair Angle 4 Position vi Remember for each document Tool Layout fe Integrated Group Single Menu Layout fe Integrated O Single Menu Group 4 2 2 Selecting Objects 10 Area Select Too The Area Select tool allows you to marquee select objects The objects are only selected if the Marquee select box is created around the entire object or clicked on directly The Area Select tool allows you to select only the objects you wish to work wi
32. Multiple Text Lines on page 172 e Font Family Style and Size on page 172 e Alignment on page 173 e Vertical Offset on page 173 Additional Parameters e Bar Width Reduction on page 174 e Device Compensation on page 174 e Narrow Bar on page 177 e Snap Bars to Output Resolution on page 178 GS1 DataMatrix About this Barcode The GS1 Data Matrix barcode is a high density high capacity scalable 2D barcode It is used to concentrate a lot of alphanumeric information in a very small space i a 0100000000000000 Parameters General Parameters e Rotation on page 170 e Code on page 170 148 Text Parameters Add Human Readable Characters on page 171 Put on Top on page 172 Multiple Text Lines on page 172 Light Margin Indicator on page 172 Font Family Style and Size on page 172 Alignment on page 173 Vertical Offset on page 173 Additional Parameters Bar Width Reduction on page 174 Device Compensation on page 174 Symbol Type on page 179 Cell Size on page 179 Width Total Height on page 180 Box on page 181 GS1 U S Coupon Interim About this Barcode DeskPack Advanced GS1 U S Coupon Interim is an interim coupon barcode It is used during the transition between UPC A coupons and the new GS1 Databar Expanded Stacked coupons that can encode more information It is made of both an old UPC A coupon barcode and a new Databar Expanded Stacked coupon barcode to be readable by both old and new
33. Original leaves the classification for this font face as defined on this machine e Use New will assign the classification from the imported file e Always Use Original stops prompting the user keeping the local classification for every conflicting font face e Always Use New stops prompting the user assigning the classification from the imported file for every conflicting font face Export Font File will export the current font list settings into an external file Revert Font List will revert any change made in the Font List to the last Save version of the Font List Save Font Listwill save the current Font List settings on your hard disk Scan for changed fonts refreshes the font list E DeskPack Advanced 12 10 Collect Files This function will collect all necessary items needed to successfully open the current job on a remote site Collected files include e The actual Illustrator file e External referenced objects images imported linework EPS e Fonts used in the design e Used ICC profiles The collected items can be saved in a folder as native files or they can be packed in a zip file Successful completion The collection of files will be successful if following criteria are met e All linked objects are found images fonts e the target disk has enough free space If collection fails every item collected so far will be removed again Note A frequently occurring situation for failed collection is
34. Other features e Image Extractor for Illustrator supports placing embedding linking of Esko CT files e What Image Extractor for Illustrator does not support 9 4 1 Placing embedding linking of Esko CT files e Image Extractor for Illustrator can place embed link Esko CT files into the Illustrator document e If the Esko CT file contains a preview image you will be asked if you want to place the preview or the actual image in the document for embedding as well as for linking e When the Esko CT file is linked and someone modifies the file Illustrator displays a message box offering an update Note When using a preview of an Esko CT file this preview will be used even for printing etc 9 4 2 What Image Extractor for Illustrator does not support e Some special types of embedded PSD layered PSD opacity mask used in a special way CMYK raster art connected to the opacity mask text in the hierarchy special clipping paths for the layer e Export data to PSD file format 225 EN E S KO x DeskPack Advanced e ICC profile of the document is not stored into an external image file 220 DeskPack Advanced 10 Instant trapper 10 1 Copyright Notice Copyright 2015 Esko Software BVBA Gent Belgium All rights reserved This material information and instructions for use contained herein are the property of Esko Software BVBA The material information and instructions are provided on an AS IS basis without warr
35. Sun Microsystems in the U S and other countries Part of this software uses technology by BestTM Color Technology EFI EFI and Bestcolor are registered trademarks of Electronics For Imaging GmbH in the U S Patent and Trademark Office Contains PowerNest library Copyrighted and Licensed by Alma 2005 2007 All other product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners Correspondence regarding this publication should be forwarded to Esko Software BVBA Kortrijksesteenweg 1095 B 9051 Gent info eur esko com 11 2 Ihe PDF Import plug in The PDF Import plug in allows opening Esko Normalized PDF files in Adobe Illustrator Almost every PDF object or construction that can be present in an Esko Normalized PDF is supported and no non native art also known as foreign art is created In addition to the artwork content various high level information or metadata is preserved It also improves speed and memory allocation of Adobe Illustrator when a single raster file is linked multiple times into the Illustrator document even when PDF Import is not directly used to import the document Errors and warnings generated during the import are logged to the Messages palette Known limitations Gradients of type Conical Rectangle and Parallellogramic created by PackEdge cannot be imported in Adobe Illustrator because Adobe Illustrator doesn t support those types of gradients 11 8 Opening a PDF Tile 246
36. Technical Inks in the fly out menu of the Viewer is enabled Technical Inks are also shown in this list See also Technical inks in Viewer on page 295 zo IE ESKOOG 200 LDeskPack Advanced Measure Ink Densities e To use the Densitometer select Separations from the Viewer preview list and click in the Viewer preview window while holding down the ALT and CONTROL key Windows or ALT and Command key Mac The densitometer will correctly measure through linework and images even placed DCS2 multichannel images that normally cannot be measured in Adobe Illustrator Viewer is compatible with Xinet fullpress and Helios OPI systems and is able to show the high resolution images stored on the OPI server The densities are shown to the right of each separation The total density of all inks on the point that is being measured the TAC value is shown at the bottom of the separation list I Process Cyan 76 1 w Process Magenta 100 0 9 Process Yellow 94 95 2 g Process Black 0 05 5 B Pantone 485 c 0 0 5 E Pantone 116 100 0 CECIL 371 0 A Note When the TAC value exceeds the TAC limit specified in the currently selected press settings a warning icon will be displayed next to the TAC value Note The percentages of technical Inks are not included in the TAC See also Technical inks in Viewer on page 295 Measure lool Measure tool helps you to measure the e Horizontal and vertical distance from the
37. The behavior of the PDF Import plug in and Illustrator depends on the type of file being opened e inpdf When the file being opened has the suffix inpdf it is automatically opened by PDF Import e pdf with Illustrator data When the file being opened is an Adobe PDF with preserved Illustrator editability it is opened as Illustrator document DeskPack Advanced e Regular pdf For all other PDF files the following dialog is shown PDF Import is used when the first option Esko PDF is chosen Adobe Illustrator shows this dialog automatically when multiple file import filters support the file being opened Select File Format 9 Esko PDF Coo Adobe PDF When the PDF file has multiple pages a dialog will pop up allowing you to specify the page you want to import Open PDF Select a page from the PDF to open This PDF contains 4 pages i mal Cancel If you enter a page number that is not in the PDF file the nearest possible page number will be taken 11 4 High level information preserved by PDF Import 11 4 1 Layers All Layer names are preserved as well as the locked status and the printability flag 247 11 S K O X DeskPack Advanced Note The Normalized PDF format does not support the hidden visible flag therefore all layers and artwork present in the PDF file are imported as visible 11 4 2 Named objects For named objects the names of the artwork are prese
38. To display or hide the trim Box and Media Box use this toggle 9 See more page boxes In case page boxes other than Trim and Media box are defined this link will open the All Page Boxes version of the palette See A Page Boxes on page 58 10 Trim Box and Media Box dropdown menu e Switch to All Page Boxes see A Page Boxes on page 58 e Fit Irim Box to Artboard DeskPack Advanced e Fit Trim Box to Artwork e Fit Trim Box to Selection e Fit Irim Box to CAD e Fit Trim Box to Crop Area e Fit Media Box to ArtBoard e Fit Media Box to Artwork e Fit Media Box to Selection e Fit Media Box to Bleed CAD when no bleed was defined the CAD will be taken as reference e Fit Media Box to Al Bleed Box e Fit Artboard to Trim Box e Fit Artboard to Media Box e Use Transform bounds if this option is enabled TrimBox MediaBox will respect as they are defined in Adobe Illustrator If disabled TrimBox MediaBox will respect visible bounds e Move Trim Box and Media Box open the Move Trim Box and Media Box interface e Delete Trim Box and Media Box The figure below illustrates the Trim Box borders and Media Box margins of an output document as interpreted on an Esko system The full black line represents the borders corresponding to one of the above options while the dotted black line indicates the margins of the document Moving and Scaling Trim Box and Media Box To move or change the size of the Trim and Media Boxes you ca
39. United States and or other countries Microsoft and the Microsoft logo are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries SolidWorks is a registered trademark of SolidWorks Corporation DeskPack Advanced ES Portions of this software are owned by Spatial Corp 1986 2003 All Rights Reserved JDF and the JDF logo are trademarks of the CIP4 Organisation Copyright 2001 The International Cooperation for the Integration of Processes in Prepress Press and Postpress CIP4 All rights reserved The Esko software contains the RSA Data Security Inc MD5 Message Digest Algorithm Java and all Java based trademarks and logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems in the U S and other countries Part of this software uses technology by BestTM Color Technology EFI EFI and Bestcolor are registered trademarks of Electronics For Imaging GmbH in the U S Patent and Trademark Office Contains PowerNest library Copyrighted and Licensed by Alma 2005 2007 All other product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners Correspondence regarding this publication should be forwarded to Esko Software BVBA Kortrijksesteenweg 1095 B 9051 Gent info eur esko com 8 2 Getting started Using the Dynamic Marks plugin you can create sets of marks add them in a document and have full control over these marks 8 2 1 Creating a first Mark Set 1 Open a
40. a 1 It can have up to 12 bars It can encode numeric or binary data e n binary mode all digits are encoded including leading zeroes ie 0001 is encoded as a three thin and one thick bar e n decimal mode you can define the number of bars in total by enter e g 6 4 The first number 6 defines the total number of bars the second 4 defines the valueto be encoded If you don t DeskPack Advanced define the number of bars in other words if you enter a single number the minimal number of bars needed for the value is used and the code is adjusted accordingly If you for example enter 9 the value will change to 4 9 as you need at least 4 bars to encode this value The defaults follow the mostly used standard Codetype A for generating the Codetype B should be changed the barcode parameters as following Narrow Bar to 1 25mm from 0 5mm Wide Bar to 3 75mm from 1 5mm and Gap to 2 5mm from 1mm By default the values for the Narrow Bar 0 5mm Wide Bar 1 5mm and Gap 1mm are set for the mostly used standard Codetype A If you want to generate a SICK code using Codetype B you should set the Narrow Bar to 1 25mm the Wide Bar to 3 75mm and the Gap to 2 5mm LLL Parameters General Parameters Rotation on page 170 Code on page 170 Additional Parameters Bar Width Reduction on page 174 Device Compensation on page 174 Height on page 175 Ratio on page 177 Narrow Bar on page 177 Wide Bar on page 177
41. barcode If you need to edit the Dynamic Barcodes barcode with your Illustrator application see Editing a Document Containing a Dynamic Barcodes Barcode without Dynamic Barcodes on page 124 Editing a Document Containing a Dynamic Barcodes Barcode without Dynamic Barcodes If you don t have the Dynamic Barcodes plug in you can still use Illustrator to do the following operations without rendering your barcode invalid If you don t have Dynamic Barcodes installed you will not be able to e move or scale the object using the Selection tool e move or distort it reflect shear or scale e change a color You will be able to e expand the bar code e Rotate by Selection or Free transform this can lead to inconsistent results so we recommend not doing this e move rotate and distort by the Transform Each command this can lead to inconsistent results SO we recommend not doing this e enclose it in the Envelope and distort e delete it e copy and paste it If the Dynamic Barcode plugin is installed but without a valid license you will be able to do everything that is allowed by the plugin except modifying the content This means for example moving and rotating is allowed but due to the bar code protection any potentially dangerous operations such as scale reflect or shear are not allowed You will also be able to change the color of the bar code Unprotecting a Dynamic Barcodes Barcode for Further Editing You can expand your
42. base or retrieval system or published in any form or in any way electronically mechanically by print photoprint microfilm or any other means without prior written permission from Esko Software BVBA This document supersedes all previous dated versions PANTONE PantoneLIVE and other Pantone trademarks are the property of Pantone LLC All other trademarks or registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners Pantone is a wholly owned subsidiary of X Rite Incorporated 9 Pantone LLC 2015 All rights reserved This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group Portions of this software are copyright 9 1996 2002 The FreeType Project www freetype org All rights reserved Portions of this software are copyright 2006 Feeling Software copyright 2005 2006 Autodesk Media Entertainment Portions of this software are copyright 91998 2003 Daniel Veillard All rights reserved Portions of this software are copyright 91999 2006 The Botan Project All rights reserved Part of the software embedded in this product is gSOAP software Portions created by gSOAP are Copyright 92001 2004 Robert A van Engelen Genivia inc All rights reserved Portions of this software are copyright 91998 2008 The OpenSSL Project and 1995 1998 Eric Young eayQcryptsoft com All rights reserved This product includes software developed by the Apache Software Foundation http www apache org Adobe the Adobe logo
43. brackets lt gt Note that you do not need to type the brackets and that object names are case sensitive Size Select the size of the object smaller or bigger than the typed size in mm Shape Select the objects which are of the same shapes as defined in the list Note that the Similar as Selected Objects option will only function if an object is selected Fill and Stroke The Fill and Strokes group has two options SELECT BY ATTRIBUTES f Object Type gt General Attributes Fill and Stroke Stroke Any H4 pt Appearance gt Color Deselect Refine Select f Collect pe p R QS Fill Select the objects with a fill Stroke Select all strokes or strokes smaller than the size you specify in the Text field Appearance The Appearence group has seven options Cf 4 4 DDeskPack Advanced SELECT BY ATTRIBUTES gt Object Type General Attributes gt Fill and Stroke Appearance Current Style Overprint Fill Type Solid B Opacity Mask I Opacity Any HH Cre Effects Blending Normal Hd Calor i UUCT Deselect T Collect Current Style Select objects similar to the selected object The selection is tied to the style of the Illustrator color palette This means that you can also search for any object with a certain style Fill Type Select the objects with a certain Fill type You can choose between Solid G
44. colored in red in the Ink Manager 3 4 6 Ink Manager Preferences The Ink Manager Preferences can be opened from Illustrator gt Preferences gt Esko gt Ink Manager Preferences Mac OS or Edit gt Preferences gt Esko gt Ink Manager Preferences Windows Ink Manager Preferences Default Values Ink Name Angle Ruling Cyan e 120 Ipi Magenta 52 5 1120 Ipi Yellow 7 5 1120 Ipi Black 82 5 120 Ipi 5pot 45 1120 Ipi Show inks of non printable layers Show inks of hidden layers Ivi Use ClassicCalors Ink Book Preferred Ink Book designer Hd FK ba Cancel In the Ink Manager Preferences you can set the Default Values angle and ruling for CMYK inks You can also set the default angle and ruling to be used for new Spot inks However these defaults can be overruled when using a Spot ink that was used before with a different Angle and Ruling value The Angle and Ruling for all used spot inks are saved in the Preferences file You can also define if inks that are only used in non printable layers or hidden layers should be shown in the ink manager by setting the Show inks of non printable layers and Show inks of hidden layers option Note The Remap Ink functionallity also takes the Show inks of non printable layers and Show inks of hidden layers option into account When switched off inks on non printable or hidden layers will not be remapped Enable Use C
45. colored with 10096 cyan in your document the Ink Manager will only contain one ink Cyan When you create a custom mark the default color attribute is Dynamic At this moment the color definition of the mark becomes 10096 of the first ink in the ink manager Because Ink Manager doesn t read inks from marks with color attribute Registration Darkest or Dynamic 220 DeskPack Advanced ES and because there are no other objects in the document the inks list in the Ink Manager will be empty and so will the custom mark be As soon as another ink is used in the document this ink will be the first ink in Ink Manager and will be used by the Custom Mark In the same way if the original document would contain e g one object in cyan and one in magenta and nothing else creating a Custom Mark from the cyan object would make magenta the first ink in the ink manager so the mark would change from cyan to magenta Can I start from an existing standard mark to create my own mark symbols Yes you can as long as you remember to expand the mark symbol first i e making it a regular object instead of a symbol What if delete a symbol in the DynamicMarks CS6 ai file If you delete a symbol in the DynamicMarks ai file the symbol will obviously no longer be available in the Set Symbol list If you delete the default symbol for a Standard Mark creating the corresponding Standard Mark will result in an error message To fix th
46. defined By default the last used ink book is shown Available Ink Types are Normal Opaque Varnish and Technical The ink type for process inks cannot be changed The ink type is always normal The following Pantone inks are always opaque inks Pantone 8003 C Pantone 8021 C Pantone 8062 C Pantone 8100 C Pantone 8201 C Pantone 8281 C Pantone 8321 C Pantone 871 C Pantone 872 C Pantone 873 C Pantone 874 C Pantone 875 C Pantone 876 C Pantone 877 C The ink type of these inks cannot be changed Note If you change an Ink to Technical or Opaque the ink will be moved to the bottom of the Ink list If you change the ink order afterwards this new order will be respected Dotshape shows a list of all dotshapes available for the FlexRip However it is possible to enter any dot that is available on your rip instead of the proposed dotshapes Only use a dotshape that is installed on the rip that will be used to expose the document Note Entering a dotshape is not compatible with Nexus HIP These Ink options are stored in the Illustrator document and are used by other DeskPack plug ins like Power Trapper Client PowerLayout Client etc For example PowerTrapper Client will ignore varnish and technical inks and will take the opaqueness of inks in account when determining trap directions You can define the Printing Method See Printing Method on page 25 Note Global swatches cannot be converted 3 4 3 The Ink Manager flyout menu
47. e asolid rectangle using the bounding box of a Text Mark e asolid rectangle using the bounding box of a Barcode Mark e asolid rectangle using the bounding box of a Grid Mark The Add Bar option available for Grid Marks will stretch the White Underprint over the full size of the Media Box or Trim Box if no Media Box is defined e For vertical grid marks the White Underprint object will be a vertical bar using the width of the grid mark and the height of the Media Box e For horizontal grid marks the White Underprint object will be a horizontal bar using the height of the grid mark and the width of the Media Box If the Mark is modified deleted or expanded the White Underprint will also be modified deleted or expanded White Underprint Ink The Ink used for White Underprint on Dynamic Marks can be defined by clicking the Ink Settings button and entering the name of the Ink to be used for White Underprint In case the defined ink doesn t exist yet a new spot color will be added to the swatches using the Ink name and the Color patch When the name of an existing swatch is entered this ink will be used for White Underprint Note White Underprint can only use Spot Colors If an existing swatch name is entered and the swatch is not a spot color a warning will be generated A swatch by this name already exists but is not defined as a Spot Color If you change the White Underprint ink all White Underprint objects on Dyna
48. file in Illustrator Create some objects you want to use as marks 2 Goto Window gt Esko gt Dynamic Marks gt Dynamic Marks to open the Dynamic Marks panel DYNAMIC MARK The document does not have a Mark Set yet Load a Mark Set Create a Mark Set Once loaded or created add marks to the Mark Set by clicking the Add Standard Mark button or by selecting artwork and clicking the Add Selected Art as Mark button 3 Click Create a Mark Set to start a new Mark Set Tor ES E S KO x DeskPack Advanced Note This step is optional If no Mark Set is present you can also immediately start adding marks see step 4 a new Mark Set will be created automatically 4 You can add marks in two ways e Select the objects you want to use as mark one by one and click the Add Selected Art as Mark button Lt Click the Add Standard Mark button o to add a standard mark to the set 5 From the fly out menu select Save mark set Note You can only save a Mark set if the Illustrator file is saved If not you will be prompted to do so before saving the Mark Set 6 3 ne Dynamic Marks palette In the Dynamic Marks palette you can manage the marks in a set The palette will show the name of the latest loaded or saved mark set and all the marks in the set The icon in front of the mark name will show the type of mark a standard mark text an object DYNAMIC MARKS Default Mark Set cut Mark 1 2 Gradation Strip
49. groups of selection criteria are available e Object Type e General Attributes e Fill and Stroke e Appearance e Color 209 12 ESKOOG LDeskPack Advanced It s good to know that Select By Attributes works differently when combining selections within the same selection group or when combining selection criteria in different selection groups When adding selection criteria in the same selection group Select by Attributes will simply add the search criteria e g searching in Object Type for a Path Text and a Mesh will result in a selection of all paths all text and all mesh objects However when combining selections in different selection groups Select by Attributes will combine the selection criteria e g searching for Text in Object Type and Stroke in Fill and Stroke will only select text objects colored with a stroke Note Click on a triangle to collapse or expand the section Alt click on an expanded section to open all the sections Alt click on a collapsed section to expand that secttion and collapse all others 12 6 1 Object Type 266 The Object Type group has ten options SELECT BY ATTRIBUTES x Object Type Path Any Mesh Text All H4 pt Dynamic Barcode Symbol Dynamic Table Linked File All H4 B Dynamic Object image Any Image H4 Thin Part Fix General Attributes Fill and Stroke D D gt Appearance D Deselect Vt Col
50. in the fly out menu Click New in the Press Settings dialog Enter the name of the new press setting in the New dialog Click OK A Q N 14 2 3 Copying a Press Setting To copy duplicate a Press Setting Select it in the Press Settings dialog Click the Copy button Give it a new Name Change its parameters as you wish see The Press Settings in Detail on page 284 Click OK 0O A 0 N 14 2 4 Editing a Press Setting To edit a Press Setting Select it in the Press Settings dialog Click the Modify button Change its parameters as you wish see The Press Settings in Detail on page 284 Click OK A GO N 14 2 5 Deleting a Press Setting To delete a Press Setting 1 Select it in the Press Settings dialog 2 Click the Delete button 283 IE ESKOOG 3 Confirm that you want to delete it 14 2 6 Choosing a Press Setting DDeskPack Advanced e To select a Press Setting select it in the Press dropdown in the Viewer dialog 14 2 7 The Press Settings in Detail 284 First Dot opecifies which minimal gray value expressed in 96 in the file still will yield a dot on the plate provided the RIP and platemaking occur under normal conditions Note Normal conditions indicate that the DGC must have been set up completely The value does not correspond with any measurement that has been made prior or during DGC set up nor does it correspond with any densito
51. is selected the Gradation Strip is attached to the Trim Box If you change the Positioning setting the blue rectangle the gradation strip will rotate automatically based on the position of the blue rectangle Width The width can be set to One Strip per Ink or to Repeat to Fit Symbol allows to change the symbol used for the Gradation Strip Mark See Changing the Symbol on page 201 You can use any type of art in the symbol but only paths and compound paths will be colored If you will use any text in your Gradation Strip symbol it will be automatically colored with darkest ink If you change the default Gradation Strip symbol the default position will be based on the size of the symbol If the width of the symbol is bigger than its height the Gradation Strip will be created horizontally by default If the height is bigger the Gradation Strip will be created vertically by default DDeskPack Advanced Flip when set to Normal the gradation is built from left to right when set to Reverted the gradation strip is built from right to left Grid Mark Properties Grid Marks are created from a symbol named GridMark and are by default a rectangle of 5 x 5mm in Registration color X Dynamic Marks Properties Position Attach to PowerLayout Grid 1 4 Color Registration HH v Include Technical Inks Mark Position amp Copies wee la Run Reference Outer Top Cell B Position Offset Dm
52. its name The name of an object can be found and modified in the Illustrator Layer palette Object names are by default placed between angled brackets lt gt Note that you do not need to type the brackets and that object names are case sensitive Size Select the size of the object smaller or bigger than the typed size in mm Shape Select the objects which are of the same shapes as defined in the list Note that the Similar as Selected Objects option will only function if an object is selected 12 6 3 Fill and Stroke The Fill and Strokes group has two options SELECT BY ATTRIBUTES gt Object Type gt General Attributes gt Fill and 5trake Stroke Any H D pt Appearance gt Color Deselect Refine Select Collect Fill Select the objects with a fill Stroke Select all strokes or strokes smaller than the size you specify in the Text field 12 6 4 Appearance The Appearence group has seven options 26 12 DeskPack Advanced SELECT BY ATTRIBUTES gt Object Type General Attributes gt Fill and Stroke Appearance Current Style Overprint Fill Type Solid B Opacity Mask I Opacity Any HH Cre Effects Blending Normal Hd Calor 0001 Deselect T Collect Current Style Select objects similar to the selected object The selection is tied to the style of the Illustrator color palette This means that you can also searc
53. let Dynamic Barcodes switch to Numeric compaction mode automatically when your barcode contains numeric data This encodes the numeric data in your barcode more efficiently Note Dynamic Barcodes can always switch to the Binary compaction mode if your barcode contains binary data If you don t enable either Allow Text Compaction or Allow Numeric Compaction Dynamic Barcodes will only use Binary compaction mode PZN About this Barcode The PZN Pharma Zentral Nummer barcode is used for distribution of pharmaceutical and healthcare products in Germany It encodes the letters PZN and up to seven digits of data PZN 0000000 Parameters General Parameters e Rotation on page 170 e Code on page 170 Text Parameters e Add Human Readable Characters on page 171 e Font Family Style and Size on page 172 e Alignment on page 173 e Vertical Offset on page 173 Additional Parameters e Bar Width Reduction on page 174 e Device Compensation on page 174 e Size on page 175 e Height on page 175 DeskPack Advanced e Characters per unit on page 175 e Ratio on page 177 e Narrow Bar on page 177 e Snap Bars to Output Resolution on page 178 e Box on page 181 PZN8 amp About this Barcode The PZN8 Pharma Zentral Nummer barcode is used for distribution of pharmaceutical and healthcare products in Germany It encodes the letters PZN and up to eight digits of data PZN 00000000 Parameters General Param
54. number of columns corresponds to the number of PDF417 codewords Rows You can give your barcode between 3 and 90 Rows Truncated Choose Truncated to make the symbol less wide by truncating the end character which is not part of the encoded data and the end pattern In the example below the top PDF417 barcode is not truncated and the bottom barcode is truncated but encodes the same data SE LERRA A a Initialize in Alpha Submode Choose this option to generate a shift to Text mode character at the beginning of the barcode when using Text compaction mode This makes the encoding clear for barcode scanners Allow Text Compaction Choose this to let Dynamic Barcodes switch to Text compaction mode automatically when your barcode contains text data This encodes the text data in your barcode more efficiently it makes that part of your barcode smaller Allow Numeric Compaction Choose this to let Dynamic Barcodes switch to Numeric compaction mode automatically when your barcode contains numeric data This encodes the numeric data in your barcode more efficiently Note Dynamic Barcodes can always switch to the Binary compaction mode if your barcode contains binary data If you don t enable either Allow Text Compaction or Allow Numeric Compaction Dynamic Barcodes will only use Binary compaction mode Error Correction Level 160 DeskPack Advanced Error correction adds check sums to the barcode to detect an
55. of every ink used in the document If you change the tint to e g 4296 the mark will get 4296 of every ink used in the document Changing the inks in the document can change the color of the mark Technical inks are not used in the mark Note If you manually change the color of a mark set to Registration its color setting will change to Static see below using the newly set color Static If color is set to Static the current color is stored based on the actual inks The color of the mark will not change if the order of the ink list is changed Note When placed on an existing document Static marks are the only marks that affect the ink list the inks used in the mark will be added if necessary Dynamic If color is set to Dynamic the current color is stored but based on the ink positions in the Ink Manager and not the actual inks For example if the first ink is Cyan a 10096 cyan mark is stored as 10096 of the first ink If the first ink is different by changing the ink order or by placing the mark on a different file the mark will become 10096 of the first ink Note If the ink list in the document changes after adding the marks you must click Update Ink List in the Ink Manager for the marks to adjust to the updated ink list Darkest The mark will be colored with 10096 of the darkest ink used in the document You can t change the percentage for Darkest ink it will always be 100 Changing the ink
56. only which can be an average for bold serif and normal fonts Also bear in mind that not every sans serif font a font without these decorative extensions is easier to print than a serif font since some font types have both thin and thick parts which makes it more logical to classify them as serif fonts than as sans serif The assigned values will be stored locally allowing Preflight for Illustrator to use this database for every job to be checked This database can be exported for use at other sites where Preflight for Illustrator is applied 12 9 2 Parameter Fonts 274 Each font family member occupies one line in the font list Next to the font name 2 checkboxes allow you to classify the typeface with a single click For serif fonts mark the box preceded by a capital S with the caps accented in red Bold fonts get a checkmark in the box prededed by a capital B The combination of the two is also possible of course 12 LDeskPack Advanced When Illustrator is launched your system is scanned for active fonts These can be fonts residing in your system folder or fonts activated with a font management tool like ATM Suitcase or others If new fonts are active at that moment they will be added to the Preflight for Illustrator font list Depending on the availability and the state of classification of the font each font entry can have one of four different colors 1 White the font is classified and availabl
57. or location and save the parameter file with the current parameter file name or allows you to enter a new name possibly with a password 12 5 The Validator labsheet The actual checking is performed using the Validator palette This dialog contains an overview of all rules that will be checked The list can grow or shrink according to the options or tab sheets that are enabled First a parameter file is selected This is done either by interactively defining the parameters in the Parameters tab or by selecting a parameter file in the Parameter Options menu Parameter sets can also be selected in the Validator tab A pulldown menu allows you to choose from sets which were previously imported with the Import Parameter File option in the Validator Options Menu The Check button will perform the actual inspection The list is then updated to reflect the reported problems and or occurances Stop at violating rule This option determines whether Preflight for Illustrator will perform all tests or stops at the first one that reports problems The indicator on the right above the list box is the overall status indicator Whenever one or more rules indicate irregularities this icon reflects this to avoid missing out an error while scrolling the list 203 rm Skoo DDeskPack Advanced x A grey dot means that the job has not been checked yet or the design was changed after the latest check possibly introducing new problems w
58. page 177 e Narrow Bar on page 177 e Snap Bars to Output Resolution on page 178 e Box on page 181 aetus Pharma Code About this Barcode This barcode was developed specifically to meet the requirements of the pharmaceutical packaging process It has established itself as the worldwide pharmaceutical industry barcode standard It can encode numeric or binary data Parameters Laetus Pharma General Parameters e Rotation on page 170 e Code on page 170 Additional Parameters e Miniature Use this option to create a miniature version of the bar code e Bar Width Reduction on page 174 e Device Compensation on page 174 e Height on page 175 e Ratio on page 177 154 e Narrow Bar on page 177 e Wide Bar on page 177 e Gap on page 177 e Snap Bars to Output Resolution on page 178 e Decimal Input on page 178 e Box on page 181 M S About this Barcode DeskPack Advanced The M S 7 barcode is an EAN 8 barcode modified by Marks amp Spencer s for use on own brand products sold in their stores To make the M S 7 barcode the initial O is removed and the extra letters M and S are added to the human readable characters This means that the human readable characters contain seven digits plus the M and S letters Note This doesn t affect the data encoded in the barcode it still encodes eight digits so you should enter eight digits when creating a M S 7 barcode tM 00
59. parameters are set to the object 5 The variable inks are shown in the InkManager table 219 13 DeskPack Advanced Ink Name ype Ruling Angle Dotshape De Process cyan 7 120 00 22 50 Elliptical E 133 00 22 50 Eliptical E 2 Process Yellow Normal 133 00 7 50 Elliptical E 120 00 7 50 Elliptical E 3 E rrocess slack Normal 120 00 8250 Elliptical E 150 00 82 50 Elliptical E Base Inks 3 Note Currently we do not have the possibility to apply DGCs per object or region The best workaround would indeed be the slight adjustment of angles of a screen This method is based on the fact that only a limited set of angles of screens is available in our FlexRip and that a map to nearest rule will be applied to choose the screen This way 2 screens with a very small difference in angle will eventually map to the same screen but with different DGCs applied to them Job object A with screen A and e g angle of 7 5 object B with screen A and e g angle of 8 5 Screens on rip screen A with e g angles of 0 7 5 15 DGC strategy icpro Angle of 7 5 gt dgc 1 dgc Angle of 8 5 dgc 2 dgc What will happen on the rip 1 There is a DGC selection based on the icpro file that was sent along screen A with angle 7 5 will get dgc 1 dgc applied to it screen A with angle 8 5 will get dgc 2 dgc applied to it 2 A screen will be chosen and the DGC will be kept screen A with angle 7 5 will stay screen A
60. reference CROSSHAIR TOOL 2 E Y Aligning Objects to the Crosshair Guide lines To align Objects to the Crosshair Guide lines 1 Select the objects to be aligned 2 Click on the Align Art button 3 Select All Directions Align Vertical or Align Horizontal to create the alignment configuration you desire 16 9 wc H Clicking on one of the 9 art alignment buttons will align the objects to crosshair guides using the selected settings The combination of aligning the Crosshair guides to objects and then objects to the Crosshair guides gives you the ability to quickly create objecs that are correctly aligned to each other To align the left border of an object A to the right border of an object B while at the same time keeping the vertical position of object A do the following OO 4 84 DeskPack Advanced Select object B Align the crosshair to the right border of object B set angle to zero first Select object A Change the align mode to align Art Select the Align Horizontal mode Left align the object A to the Crosshair guides oOo SONS Assigning Crosshair Preferences The Crosshair Preferences dialog allows you to determine crosshair settings across documents You can keep the Angle and Position of the Crosshair for all documents when switching between or opening documents by selecting remember for each document or you can use the same Crosshair settings across all d
61. respective owners Pantone is a wholly owned subsidiary of X Rite Incorporated 9 Pantone LLC 2015 All rights reserved This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group Portions of this software are copyright 9 1996 2002 The FreeType Project www freetype org All rights reserved Portions of this software are copyright 2006 Feeling Software copyright 2005 2006 Autodesk Media Entertainment Portions of this software are copyright 91998 2003 Daniel Veillard All rights reserved Portions of this software are copyright 91999 2006 The Botan Project All rights reserved Part of the software embedded in this product is gSOAP software Portions created by gSOAP are Copyright 92001 2004 Robert A van Engelen Genivia inc All rights reserved Portions of this software are copyright 91998 2008 The OpenSSL Project and 1995 1998 Eric Young eayQcryptsoft com All rights reserved This product includes software developed by the Apache Software Foundation http www apache org Adobe the Adobe logo Acrobat the Acrobat logo Adobe Creative Suite Illustrator InDesign PDF Photoshop PostScript XMP and the Powered by XMP logo are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and or other countries Microsoft and the Microsoft logo are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries SolidWorks is a registered trademark
62. scanners s Migodi 99274 a Parameters General Parameters Rotation on page 170 Code on page 170 Text Parameters 149 ESKO NEM 150 e Add Human Readable Characters on page 171 e Font Family Style and Size on page 172 Additional Parameters e Use 992 Prod Family in UPC on page 173 e Max Row Width on page 173 e Bar Width Reduction on page 174 e Device Compensation on page 174 e Magnification on page 174 e Narrow Bar on page 177 e Gap on page 177 e Vertical alignment on page 177 e Snap Bars to Output Resolution on page 178 HIBC 128 About this Barcode This barcode is based on the Code 128 symbology It encodes the organization s primary and or secondary Labeler Identification Code LIC This encoding begins with the character If both primary and secondary Labeler Identification Codes are encoded in one barcode they are divided by the character 000 4 Parameters General Parameters e Rotation on page 170 e Code on page 170 Text Parameters e Add Human Readable Characters on page 171 e Font Family Style and Size on page 172 e Vertical Offset on page 173 Additional Parameters e Bar Width Reduction on page 174 e Device Compensation on page 174 e Magnification on page 174 e Height on page 175 e Snap Bars to Output Resolution on page 178 e Box on page 181 HIBC 39 About this Barcode This barcode is based on the Code 39 symbology DeskPack Advanced I
63. size parameters Bar Width Reduction Device Compensation and Magnification so that the bars width and height take up a complete number of pixels or dots Enable Snap Bars to Output Resolution and enter the resolution you will use to print your barcode in ppi Decimal Input Use this parameter to change the type of data you can enter in the Code field e Disable it to enter the data to encode in binary format e Enable it to enter the data in decimal instead of binary format DeskPack Advanced Note When using binary format for the Laetus Pharma Code CLF 8 barcode data you need to use a special Pharma binary format To convert a decimal number into a Pharma binary number do the following 1 Add 1 to your decimal number 2 Convert the result to a binary number using a regular binary conversion algorithm 3 Remove the first digit which is 1 You now have your Pharma binary input for the Laetus Pharma Code CLF 8 barcode For example you want to encode the number 3 1 34124 2 4 in binary is 100 3 Without the first digit it s OO Enter 00 in the Code field of your Laetus Pharma Code CLF 8 barcode Add Check Digit Use this parameter to add a check digit to your barcode data Note Code 39 doesn t usually contain a check digit but it can be required in some cases symbol ype Choose the number of cells to use for your barcode in the format horizontal cells x vertical cells Note If the number of cells
64. to make your first trap 1 Open the document you want to trap in Adobe Illustrator 2 In Illustrator s Tools panel double click Instant Trapper s Trap to Objects or Trap to All tool DeskPack Advanced 3 In the Instant Trapper palette that opens choose your trapping parameters Trap Distance Truncate mode Corners type and Trapping to White Objects or not X m Trap Distance Hpx Truncate E Comers Trap to white objects 229 10 c S K O X DeskPack Advanced For more information about the trapping parameters see Setting Instant Trapper Parameters on page 231 4 Trap your object as follows To spread an object to another object click into the first object with the Trap to Objects tool drag the cursor into the second object and click To spread an object to all objects touching it click into it with the Trap to All tool Note Use Option to change the direction from spread to choke For more information about trapping an object to another object or to all objects of the background foreground touching it see e Using the Trap to Objects Tool on page 233 e Using the Trap to All Tool on page 236 230 DeskPack Advanced 10 4 The Instant Trapper Plug in The Instant Trapper plug in consists of two tools Trap to Objects and Trap to All and a Instant Trapper palette e The Trap to Objects tool enables you to do full or partial interactive trapping of objects to other obje
65. when an Illustrator file is opened and a warning about missing fonts is ignored Note Collection fails if Preflight for Illustrator cannot locate the external files or used fonts Caution Collection will not work with multi file DCS2 files Pd Ig eskoo DDeskPack Advanced 13 Screening 13 1 Introduction The current version of DeskPack for Adobe Illustrator can only handle 1 specific Ink parameter set per separation To be able to apply specific DGC strategies or to be able to have multiple lineatures and or multiple angles or screening into a single separation this concept needs to be extended The usage of these mixtures is very common in Packaging jobs In addition to the ability to have different DGC strategies applied to different parts of a job in specific cases it is necessary to exclude certain objects from DGC e g compensation might be necessary in specific halftone areas but not in flat logo tints since it might damage the integrity of the corporate color The FlexRip has support for such concepts in case properly tagged objects are provided to the Rip When exporting to Normalized PDF file the additional technical parameters of ink and objects tagged with these inks are exported as well This document contains the following topics e Screening for Illustrator overview e Screening for Illustrator workflow e Added features of the InkManager table 13 2 Screening for Illustrator overview InkManager a
66. works on individual objects within a Group of objects Using the Adobe Illustrator Direct Select tool only allows you to edit and reposition an object s individual node points Using the boostX Select tool allows you to select complete subpaths of Compound or grouped objects Marquee select an objects compound path with the boastX DirectSelect tool Dust Select Too The Dust Select tool allows you to select objects of equal or lesser size based on the Marquee Select box you create The marquee Select box can be created anywhere on the drawing surface Dust Select tool will calculate the area and search the drawing for other objects of the same size or smaller and select those objects Note Size definition The Dust Select tool will take both width and length into account and will not only look at the surface area The Dust Select tool becomes a useful utility for finding small dust like objects These small objects can be too small for printing or are artifacts of scanned artwork that need to be removed To use the Dust Select tool Choose Window gt Tools Hold down the mouse button to show the Selection options gt boostX Dust Tool The Dust tool is now the active tool of the Adobe Illustrator Tool Box To create a selection use your mouse to make a Marquee Selection box of a desired size The Dust Select Tool will search the drawing to select the objects of the same size or smaller all objects satisfying the
67. x DeskPack Advanced e onthe right side with a reference to the outer left cell e using a 3mm offset in horizontal direction Omm in vertical direction e repeat Every 1 up e symbol 10 x 5 mm in Registration color 1 x Sheet A Custom Mark using these settings e The mark is a rectangle of 10 by 5 mm e Attached to the Media Box e A3mm horizontal offset to the upper right part of the Media Box e using Registration color 2x Label Row Two Grid Marks using these settings e attached to PowerLayout Grid 1 e Right mark is on the right side Left mark is on the left side both with a reference to the outer left cell e Right mark is aligned to the right bottom corner Left mark to the upper left corner e using a 3mm offset in horizontal direction Omm in vertical direction e repeat Every 1 up e symbol 5x 5 mm in Registration color Mark Set 1 Esko A set for maximum 6 inks in the document units mm e 1 Registration Mark placed on every side e a Text Mark with the name of the document e a Text Mark with the date e a Gradation Strip on the left with 1 rectangle per ink colored in 10096 e a Gradation Strip on the right with a 4096 80 and 100 rectangle for every ink e 6 Text Marks one per ink with the name of the ink and colored in 100 of the ink Mark Set 2 Esko A set for maximum 6 inks in the document units mm same as Mark Set 1 but with different type of Registration Mark Mark Set 3 Esko A set f
68. 0 20 THe Fage BOX Fug MI NE T EORUM 55 POTATO UC O DANN METTRE 55 JOL qais q asB sds anea E E eee 55 SOS AIP TID O a E 58 3 7 Ihe Inspection Setup PUI HU eneen ERE rd re Ki tutte uU Nn Usb Usa OR nid 60 3 7 1 Adding and changing Inspection points eene nennen 61 3 7 2 Adding and changing Inspection boxes ssssssssse eee meme ene 62 3 4 9 Dynamic Art PIacernaolcdelS cineri tertio rH SIDA RERO ob POR vig GE orbe vt mta UR 62 3 7 4 Import and Export een ene nennen eere nein 62 38 INS SS lS c MR 63 30 1 UNSC SS Ss Fl Uo UT 63 3 8 2 Filtering the Messages nennen nennen nen 64 3 8 3 SAVING TS MESSSOQSS teta IU ulus tria an a Y dta vaut ns oa lun opem S AGAR 65 3 8 4 Clearing the Messaggs sss eee emnt nini neni 66 3 9 Esko Document SelLl sscasseniitenteacn ai aea ihien giiia RE eiiiai 66 CES NIB regie a oo mR m 66 Contents 39 2 SELSSM SCS EAL OM Maas eset cnn hah a hes qoc cinch cla toast tal N 66 da DOOS Diuris 68 ere MIQUE NOGE DT e A TTTUTEEUTUTT 68 2 2 Using DOOSUS ausa tiva phot UE nate di a Mon tad cn ct oes ota re Se st thane 69 7 Ew 2 111 DOOS REO DOS DUM 69 42 2 CISC LING CIOS CLS assisted sheeted t MM ioe heel dort TEE dite eof itus cH A 70 neces an aceies aaa geese EA aden ae nape e eee 79 2 2 4 Grosshalr TOOL seed tato dl etes etia et tl reallocate lh ca ncaa eae 80 d In TX eee Reo ee item bam tubes
69. 0 e Box on page 181 Specific Parameters Minimum Symbol Size Choose the number of cells to use for your barcode in the format horizontal cells x vertical cells Note If the number of cells you choose for your symbol is too small to encode the data you entered in Code Dynamic Barcodes will use a bigger symbol size automatically Error Correction Error correction adds check sums to the barcode to detect and correct incorrect data You can choose one of the following Error correction levels e Level L 7 of codewords can be restored e evel M 15 of codewords can be restored e Level Q 2596 of codewords can be restored e evel H 3096 of codewords can be restored Note Keep in mind that a higher correction level makes the barcode bigger as more check sums are added to the barcode and may limit the maximum length of the encoded data Width Height The Width and Height parameters depend on the Cell Size and the number of cells used for the symbol Minimum Symbol Size For example a symbol of 25 x 25 cells where each cell is 2 mm gives a Width and Height of 50 x 50 mm MicroQR About this Barcode The Micro QR Code is a very small QR Code for use on smaller spaces for example to encode the ID of printed circuit boards and electronics parts It works with smaller amounts of data maximum 35 numeric characters and uses only one position pattern gg 165 ESKO NEM 166 Parameters General Parame
70. 00 000 S Parameters General Parameters e Rotation on page 170 e Code on page 170 Text Parameters e Add Human Readable Characters on page 171 e Font Family Style and Size on page 172 e Vertical Offset on page 173 Additional Parameters e Bar Width Reduction on page 174 195 ESKO NEM 156 e Device Compensation on page 174 e Magnification on page 174 e Height on page 175 e Snap Bars to Output Resolution on page 178 e Box on page 181 MSI About this Barcode MSI also known as Modified Plessey was developed by the MSI Data Corporation based on the original Plessey Code It is a numeric barcode used primarily to mark retail shelves for inventory control 0000 000 TM Parameters General Parameters e Rotation on page 170 e Code on page 170 Text Parameters e Add Human Readable Characters on page 171 e Font Family Style and Size on page 172 e Alignment on page 173 e Vertical Offset on page 173 Additional Parameters e Bar Width Reduction on page 174 e Device Compensation on page 174 e Height on page 175 e Characters per unit on page 175 e Ratio on page 177 e Narrow Bar on page 177 e Snap Bars to Output Resolution on page 178 DeskPack Advanced e Box on page 181 Marks amp Spencer s About this Barcode The Marks amp Spencer s barcode is also an EAN 8 barcode modified by Marks amp Spencer s for use Parameters General Parameters e Rotation on
71. 1 L Custom Mark 1 L Custom Mark 2 L Custom Mark 3 Tl Custom Mark 4 In the palette you can e change the name of a Mark by double clicking it select and zoom in on a Mark by clicking the button alls or from the fly out menu add the selected artwork as a Mark by clicking the button iat or from the fly out menu See Adding objects as Mark on page 190 add a Standard Mark by clicking the button o or from the fly out menu See Adding a Standard Mark on page 189 188 DeskPack Advanced ES remove the selected Mark by clicking the button or from the fly out menu Note Removing a Mark will remove the entry in the Mark Set as well as the actual object e expand a mark by selecting the function in the fly out menu Expanding a mark replaces the Dynamic Mark by a normal object e change the order of the Marks by clicking and dragging e f the corresponding objects are in the same layer in the Layers menu their order will be changed the same way e f you change the order in the Layers palette the Marks in the Dynamic Marks palette will change accordingly Note that the Marks list shows the topmost Mark at the bottom of the list while the Layers palette works the other way around Note Same as in Adobe lllustrator s Layer palette there are two different types of selecting in the Dynamic Marks palette e f you click the name the Mark is selected in a blue bar but the actual art is not selected in Adobe Illu
72. 100 Process Magenta E Process Magenta 160 Process Yellow ial z Process Yellow 100 BBR Process slack Process Yellow ll PANTONE 477 C ES Mask L None ipm Note The drop down list only contains inks that are defined in your document 4 Click the Apply button at the bottom of the palette 94 5 DeskPack Advanced You can see that the ink has been remapped in your image Note If you want to undo the remapping use Command Z 5 4 The Channel Mapping Palette You can open the Channel Mapping palette from Window gt Esko gt Channel Mapping When you select a CMYK image this palette shows e the Name of the original linked image e ifthis image is in Overprint or not e the inks used in your image in the Inks column e the inks those inks are currently mapped to in the Map to column e thetint percentage used for each ink in the Tint column Channel Mapping x Mame buddha and light tif a HI gt Overprint C Process Cyan Process Cyan 100 Process Magenta P Process Magenta 100 Process Yellow Process Yellow 100 Process Black Process Black 100 95 ESKO EM Attention To see information in the Channel Mapping palette you must select either only one image or only images with similar characteristics for details see Hemapping Inks in Several Images on page 99 If you can t see information in the palette after selecting an im
73. 174 e Height on page 175 e Snap Bars to Output Resolution on page 178 e Box on page 181 UPC 9CS9 About this Barcode DeskPack Advanced The UPC SCS Shipping Container Symbol barcode is a version of the Interleaved 2 of 5 barcode that has a structure very similar to the Universal Product Code s UPC and specific formatting of the human readable interpretation 000 00000 O00DO0D Parameters General Parameters e Rotation on page 170 e Code on page 170 Text Parameters e Add Human Readable Characters on page 171 169 ESKO NEM e Font Family Style and Size on page 172 e Vertical Offset on page 173 Additional Parameters e ext Format on page 174 e Bar Width Reduction on page 174 e Device Compensation on page 174 e Magnification on page 174 e Height on page 175 e Snap Bars to Output Resolution on page 178 e Total Height on page 180 e Box on page 181 7 3 Barcode Parameters 170 Rotation To rotate your barcode by 90 180 or 270 degrees use the Rotation buttons EV To rotate it by any other angle enter that angle in the Rotation field Code Enter the data to encode in your bar code Dynamic Barcodes checks that the data you have entered is valid for your chosen Barcode Type If it isn t a warning error will pop up Code for GS1 Bar Codes When entering data to be encoded in GS1 bar codes you can either enter Application Identifiers Al including the brackets or you can enter the code with
74. 2 The FreeType Project www freetype org All rights reserved Portions of this software are copyright 2006 Feeling Software copyright 2005 2006 Autodesk Media Entertainment Portions of this software are copyright 91998 2003 Daniel Veillard All rights reserved Portions of this software are copyright 91999 2006 The Botan Project All rights reserved Part of the software embedded in this product is gSOAP software Portions created by gSOAP are Copyright 2001 2004 Robert A van Engelen Genivia inc All rights reserved Portions of this software are copyright 1998 2008 The OpenSSL Project and 1995 1998 Eric Young eayQcryptsoft com All rights reserved This product includes software developed by the Apache Software Foundation http www apache org Adobe the Adobe logo Acrobat the Acrobat logo Adobe Creative Suite Illustrator InDesign PDF Photoshop PostScript XMP and the Powered by XMP logo are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and or other countries Microsoft and the Microsoft logo are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries SolidWorks is a registered trademark of SolidWorks Corporation Portions of this software are owned by Spatial Corp 1986 2003 All Rights Reserved JDF and the JDF logo are trademarks of the CIP4 Organisation Copyright 2001 The International Cooperation for the Integration of Proces
75. 23 ESKOS 24 INK MANAGER Ink Name Type 1 Process Black Normal 2 E Process Magenta Normal 3 Process Yellow Normal 4 Process Cyan Normal 5 Cut Technical 6 varnish Varnish 7 PANTONE 583 M Normal 8 E ranton zoom Normal 9 7 PANTONE Silver Normal Base Inks 9 Ink Options opens the ink options dialog Ink Book process process process process PANTONE Colors M PANTONE Colors M PANTONE Premiu Ruling 133 00 133 00 133 00 133 00 120 00 120 00 120 00 120 00 120 00 Angle 22 50 52 50 7 50 82 50 45 00 45 00 52 50 52 50 52 50 Dotshape Round Round Round Round None None Samba P P All LDeskPack Advanced Ink Options Convert Ink to Convert Ink to CMYK Convert all Spot Inks to CMYK Update Ink List Process Inks in Images Hide Screening Details Show Printing Method Reverse Ink Order Save CMYK Ink Order as Default Restore Default CMYK Order Sort Light To Dark Sort Dark To Light Convert Ink to has the same functionality as the Convert to Other button E Convert Ink to CMYK has the same functionality as the Convert to CMYK button El Convert all Spot Inks to CMYK converts all the spot inks in the document to their CMYK equivalent Note Keep in mind that this function will also convert white objects created by the White Underprint plugin using a special spot ink Update Ink list refr
76. 25 FNC 1 8100 GS1 128 Coupon Extended Code N4 N6 FNC1 8101 GS1 128 Coupon Extended Code N4 N1 N5 N4 FNC1 8102 GS1 128 Coupon Extended Code N4 N1 N1 FNC1 8110 Coupon Code Identification for Use in North N4 X 70 FNC1 America 8200 Extended Packaging URL N4 X 70 FNC1 90 Information Mutually Agreed Between N2 X 30 FNC1 Trading Partners 91 to 99 Company Internal Information N2 X 30 FNC1 Notes e The first position indicates the length number of digits of the GS1 Application Identifier The following value refers to the format of the data content The following convention is applied CNS gt archers 000 3 numeric algits fixed length up to 3 numeric digit e f only year and month are available DD must be filled with two zeroes e The fourth digit of this GS1 Application Identifier indicates the implied decimal point position Example e 3100 Net weight in kg without a decimal point e 3102 Net weight in kg with two decimal points e FNC1 All GS1 Application Identifiers indicated with FNC1 are defined as of variable length and shall be delimited unless this Element String is the last one to be encoded in the symbol The delimiter shall be a Function 1 Symbol Character in GS1 128 Symbology GS1 DataBar Expanded Versions and GS1 Composite Symbology and should be a Function 1 Symbol Character in GS1 DataMatrix and GS1 QR Code Symbology 7 7 2 Barcode Types To create a barcode of a specific type se
77. 67 D oou 2 An EAN 13 is a numeric barcode of thirteen digits and can have two or five additional digits i 000 0 p gt DeskPack Advanced Parameters General Parameters e Rotation on page 170 e Code on page 170 Text Parameters e Add Human Readable Characters on page 171 e Light Margin Indicator on page 172 e Font Family Style and Size on page 172 e Vertical Offset on page 173 Additional Parameters e Bar Width Reduction on page 174 e Device Compensation on page 174 e Magnification on page 174 e Height on page 175 e Snap Bars to Output Resolution on page 178 e Box on page 181 GS1 128 About this Barcode GS1 128 formerly EAN 128 is a Code 128 barcode designed primarily to identify products It contains one or more FNC1 GS1 Function Code 1 control characters and Application Identifiers It shows parentheses around the human readable interpretation of the Application Identifiers but those parentheses are not encoded in the barcode co Donmyg Ec 01 00000000 It is alohanumeric and can also contain composite symbols 10310 1 H A iM UDARA COT piatidoctictigt 141 ESKO NEM 142 Parameters General Parameters e Rotation on page 170 e Code on page 170 e Composite Component on page 171 Text Parameters e Add Human Readable Characters on page 171 e Puton Top on page 172 e Multiple Text Lines on page 172 e Font Family Style and Size on page 172 e Alignment on p
78. 8 and 10 points The parameters for standard single ink fonts are set to 12 points for serif fonts to 14 points and for bold fonts to 10 points After checking Preflight for Illustrator reports 3 small text object while only the 6 and 8 point text is lower than what was defined for bold text 10 points Minimum x height allows to check for a minimum x height of the font family The x height is the height of the letter x Build Font List This option will build a list with all fonts available on your system Clicking this button has the same result as selecting the Show Font List option in the Window Submenu This list is automatically created or updated when launching Illustrator but in some situations e g when activating new fonts while working on a job an update might be necessary For more details on this refer to the chapter The Font List 12 4 5 Other The Other tab contains all parameters that are difficult to be catalogued within one of the other tabs Minimum Dot percentage will report a problem if colors are used that have an ink component using a density value below the specified percentage Zero percent will always be ignored Maximum Dot percentage will report a problem if colors are used that have a component using a density value above the specified percentage 100 is treated as an exception if Include Solid is enabled 100 components will also report a problem while if disabled no problem will be reported
79. AT S K O X DeskPack Advanced 48 Export Selected Objects to ArtiosCAD File Preview ArtiosCAD File Save selected objects in Main Design Layer Annotation layers based on Adobe Illustrator layers Q Layers based on ArtiosCad Line Type swatches Ivi Include a copy of FIRETRUCK ARD Board information and graphics layers are not copied Rebuilding the design will not be possible Remove Lines f Place this ArtiosCAD file in the document The current Artios CAD file will be replaced by this saved file M Highlight Selection Cancel S 4 Do one or more of the following e Save the selected objects in the Main Design Layer e nclude a copy of the original ARD file e Place this ArtiosCAD file in the document For more information on the different options please refer to Export Selected Objects to ArtiosCAD File on page 41 5 Click Save As The selected objects are saved in the Main Design Layer They get the cut line type which is the default if you did not specify a swatch with as name an ArtiosCAD line type Apart from the selected objects the original ARD file is copied in the resulting ARD file and the resulting ARD file is immediately placed in the Illustrator document If you have Studio Designer you will automatically see the ARD file with the cutout folded in 3D DeskPack Advanced Orientation tal Be a How to modify a cutout window in an ArtiosCAD file 1 Open
80. Adobe Illustrator axis zero point e Horizontal and vertical distance between first and second point e The total distance and the angle between first and second point To use the Measure Tool t i Click the Measure tool on the Viewer pallet DeskPack Advanced 2 Click the first point and then click or drag to the second point on the Preview The following details are displayed on the right hand side e X X axis e Y y axis e D Distance between the first and second point e W Width e H Height e A Angle X 47 7099 mm W 96 625 mm Y 125 8B4 mm H 67 443 mm D 117 834 mm A 34 9 degr Scale Ink Densities When viewing a document containing very dark overprinting areas e g traps into dark colors it is sometimes difficult to examine the color composition of such areas in Viewer Therefore the Separations view mode offers a slider control to temporarily dim reduce the density of one or more selected separations For example setting the density value to 50 will reduce the actual density values of the selected separations by 50 when computing the composite RGB view e Select the ink s you want to dim in the ink list and use the Density slider or the edit field to scale down the density of the selected separations 14 4 2 Separations The first viewing mode shows a list of all used inks Mode re te E By default a separation is displayed in color In order to see a separation as it would appe
81. CAD Studio Toolkit for Flexibles Studio Toolkit for Labels LDeskPack Advanced and Studio Toolkit for Shrinksleeves For more information on the printable part in a Collada file please see the white paper which can be found e For Mac in the extra folder of the installation disk e For PC goto Start gt Programs gt Esko gt DeskPack Plug ins gt Data Exchange gt Extra If a Collada file contains multiple printable parts a dialog will ask you to choose one Choose that part of which you want to create the graphics in Adobe Illustrator Select Printable Part Printable Part The Collada file has multiple printable parts Please choose the one to use Y Designl M3 PA fi Design2 M3 PA Design3 M3 PA Cancel ox When an Illustrator file is opened that contains CAD data two checks are performed 1 First of all the plug in checks whether the structural design file still can be found in its original place If that is not the case the plug in will look for the structural design file in the same directory where the Illustrator file is If it finds the structural design file there it will use this structural design file instead otherwise you will be asked to browse to the new location of the file 2 A second check is performed to see if the structural design file has been modified since it was originally embedded in this Illustrator file If so the Illustrator document will be updated Placing a structural des
82. Color x Color Guide Attention Choose a fill color that is e a process or a spot color other colors might generate trapping problems e nottoo light or the barcode might be difficult to scan 3 In the Dynamic Barcodes dialog select your Barcode Type The Code field is automatically filled out with a nul default value that has the correct number of digits for your Barcode Type for example 0000000000000 for EAN 13 Dynamic Barcodes s ER Rotation Code DO000 gt Text parameters gt Additional parameters Get Properties from Job Setup 4 Click the Create button to create your barcode placeholder DODOOD ODODOU 119 ESKO NEM 120 Note You can also create a barcode placeholder in unlicensed mode see Using Dynamic Barcodes in Unlicensed Mode on page 113 Previewing and Creating a Barcode Placeholder You can use Dynamic Barcodes to preview different barcode types before creating your barcode placeholder 1 Open the Dynamic Barcodes dialog from Window Esko Dynamic Barcodes 2 Define the color of the barcode in your Illustrator color palette define a single color fill style and no stroke Color x Color Guide T C m M F i Oa K I 100 Fa Attention Choose a fill color that is e a process or a spot color other colors might generate trapping problems e nottoo light or the barcode might be difficult t
83. DF Export Preferences by choosing Illustrator gt Preferences gt Esko gt PDF Export Preferences Images and Linked Files 1 In the Images and Linked Files group choose to either Embed Images in the Normalized PDF or Save Links to the images e f you choose to embed the images you don t have any more preferences to fill in and you can just click OK Note his doesn t save the images link information except for linked ArtiosCAD graphics see Linked ArtiosCAD Graphics on page 21 e f you choose to use linked images fill in the other preferences of the dialog 2 Enable Add Preview max 72 DPI if you want your Normalized PDF to have a low resolution preview of the linked images This preview allows you to view the linked images when opening your file in Acrobat for example 14 DeskPack Advanced e Choose Copy Images Next To Output File to copy them next to the folder in which you will save the Normalized PDF so other applications like ArtPro or PackEdge can still open them when the links are broken e Choose Use Links And Apply Server Mapping to keep the images where they are but update the links for example if the images are in a shared folder located on a different machine 3 Choose where to copy the linked images 4 When choosing Use Links And Apply Server Mapping fill in a Server Mapping if the share names on the client machine and on the other server do not match a When checked Copy Links If Not On File
84. Ee cpu bua a ee re pt 85 4 9 Tt WOKING WIA Document TAKS qmi oit ubt ted MO eaten acd ids urb ER M orta de S BC EN t 85 43 2 Jsa the MK MIX Dalette ssueee rtr Ed bv PEE 0E Tato RO Mae Uu bac RH Ep Pp REP tm 85 2 4 9p get Til S StOKG aiitem n eme tdm dete HR Bop eb ent trad nnt Rd 87 AIS CIO MUO MCN REPRE DRE MOM NN 87 AiG ner Outer SLOW Ces itae adusta tovt mu da oe nidis tem ci mcenia Mera inem UE 88 A7 Rotate DOCUMEN NR No Loo o asus cT 90 mE Ghane MaDpNG P EO re ee er ee ee eee er ae 92 onere eic aM oem 92 5 2 Inks remapping in Channel Mapping sse nnne nens 93 GNO WEIN eciam 93 5 4 The Channel Mapping Palette mener nene 95 99 Remapping INKS redenaar o mS 96 Su Tetkabbid ap NE E tfta eim ttd mn va eH eee aso Et ue fat xd 96 5 5 2 Creating a New Ink for Remapping esssssse eee nennen nnne 98 5 5 9 REMOVING afi Ink from an Image usce lide Eua m ev EDD ert masa ned etu ahaa 98 5 6 Remapping Inks in 9velal ImidjOS soxcndeoit etico bati dta utara ba ade ede onan washer wales ttr unis 99 5 7 Remapping Images with MASKS sc ueste iab eaten nage aah tct eacus brut ese dab aep oaa sec aslo 100 Bell Bmbeddecd Ii ades pete etit ine eb ob tesdusdtes detto dba nette N otee erede 100 NEZ MAKEA IMAGE Sirene a a a mad a a tiutaatans ante aand olaahes 101 5 9 Making an Image OvVerpriNterniee ara E TE T E T 102 TISNO MAG TN RR E D E EAT EEA 102 ME ello E inre
85. Gap on page 177 Snap Bars to Output Resolution on page 178 Decimal Input on page 178 Box on page 181 UPC A About this Barcode Universal Product Code or UPC is the standard for article numbering in the U S A and Canada It is similar to the EAN system and compatible with it For more information on EAN see EAN 73 on page 140 DC DODO 167 ESKO NEM 168 UPC A is a numeric barcode of up to twelve digits plus two or five additional digits Nm Parameters General Parameters e Rotation on page 170 e Code on page 170 Text Parameters e Add Human Readable Characters on page 171 e Font Family Style and Size on page 172 e Vertical Offset on page 173 Additional Parameters e Bar Width Reduction on page 174 e Device Compensation on page 174 e Magnification on page 174 e Height on page 175 e Snap Bars to Output Resolution on page 178 e Box on page 181 UPC E About this Barcode UPC E is an abbreviated version of UPC A for use on smaller packages It is a numeric barcode of up to eight digits You can also directly enter the 12 digit code of UPC A codes that can be represented E Parameters General Parameters e Rotation on page 170 e Code on page 170 Text Parameters e Add Human Readable Characters on page 171 e Font Family Style and Size on page 172 e Vertical Offset on page 173 Additional Parameters e Bar Width Reduction on page 174 e Device Compensation on page 174 e Magnification on page
86. Inc MD5 Message Digest Algorithm Java and all Java based trademarks and logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems in the U S and other countries Part of this software uses technology by BestTM Color Technology EFI EFI and Bestcolor are registered trademarks of Electronics For Imaging GmbH in the U S Patent and Trademark Office Contains PowerNest library Copyrighted and Licensed by Alma 2005 2007 All other product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners Correspondence regarding this publication should be forwarded to Esko Software BVBA Kortrijksesteenweg 1095 B 9051 Gent info eur esko com 4 2 Using boostX 4 2 1 Starting boostX You can start the boostX plugin by selecting Window Esko gt boostX KE Heo New Window Arrange ent Setup Preferences 1 y M Workspace br led 1 10096 CMYK Preview Extensions m ES Application Frame _ Application Bar v Control y Tools Actions Align CF7 vy Appearance QFE Artboards ArtBrowser Attributes 3F11 Brushes F5 Color F6 Color Guide TF3 Document Dictionary Document Info Crosshair Flattener Preview Channel Mapping InkMix Gradient F9 Collection Replace Contour Graphic Styles OFS Color Engine b Info F8 Dynamic Art Layers F7 Dynamic Barcodes Links Dynamic Content b Magic Wand Dynamic Panels Navigator Dynamic Tables Pathfinder QEFI Image Extractor b Separations Preview Image
87. KO D Change profile artwork Sh apes i Purchase History Results Shapes Beverage Can 1000 ml Browse Shapes Y Shapes W Plastic Containers Metal Containers EskoArtwork 5 gt Beve rage A _ Media Pack dU s Large 2 piece beverage can Flexibles Outer Height 205 mm Category Structural Design Contents 1000 ml Printable Parts Description Metal bod Outer Diameter 85 mm Copyright Esko nv 2008 Packaging and printing pre production solutions Disclaimer Licens v 4 3 If you bought a new Shape the Shapes window should switch to the Shapes Library automatically To use an existing Shape click Library in the Shapes window Select the desired Shape and click Place OO 3 LDeskPack Advanced 006 Place from Shapes LIBRARY Description Type 4 Cell Power Wing Tray Tray with horizontal dividers forming shelfs to display the products in rows Scalable Artios CAD Beverage Can 1000 ml Large 2 piece beverage can Collada 3D Model 3 Shapes Store Activities Cancel Place 4 The Shape is either placed in the open Illustrator document or opened as a new document Only the printable area of the Shape is visible in Illustrator If you have one of the Studio products use the Studio palette to view the Shape with the printable area Shown below is a white wine bottle from Shapes with the label designed in Illustrator and with the 3D model show
88. Marks Preferences on Windows 216 DeskPack Advanced Dynamic Marks Preferences Dynamic Mark 5et Location Default Folder Users Shared EskoArtwork Marks Custom Folder Cancel Fok In the Dynamic Marks Preferences you can set the location to save and load Mark Sets e Default Folder Mark Sets will be saved to and loaded from the default Esko location e on Mac OS X Users Shared EskoArtwork DynamicMarks e on Windows Vista and 7 x NUsersNPublicNDocumentsNEskoArtworkNDynamicMarks N e on Windows XP x Documents and Settings All Users Application Data EskoArtwork DynamicMarks e Custom Folder Mark Sets will be saved to and loaded from a custom folder which you can select by clicking the Browse button 8 5 7 Esko Mark Sets When installing Dynamic Marks a number of default Mark Sets are installed as well These sets can not be changed but you can load one of these sets change it and save it under a different name Here is an overview of these Mark Sets 1 x KAMA A Custom Mark using these settings e The mark is a circle of 3 2 mm diameter and a vertical and horizontal line of 6 5 mm All lines are 0 15 mm thick e Attached to the Trim Box e The center of the mark is vertically centered and 12 mm to the right of the left border of the trim box e Using Darkest color 1 x Label Row A Grid Mark using these settings e attached to PowerLayout Grid 1 e ES E S K O
89. N2 21 Serial Number N2 X 20 FNC1 240 Additional Item Identification N3 X 30 FNC1 241 Customer Part Number N3 X 30 FNC1 242 Made to Order Variation Number N3 N 6 FNC1 243 Packaging Component Number N3 X 20 FNC1 250 Secondary Serial Number N3 X 30 FNC1 251 Reference to Source Entity N3 X 30 FNC1 203 Global Document Type Identifier GDTI N3 N13 X 17 FNC 1 254 GLN Extension Component N3 X 20 FNC1 255 Global Coupon Number GCN N3 N13 N 12 FNC1 30 Count of Items Variable Measure Trade Item N2 N 8 FNC1 310 Net weight kilograms Variable Measure N4 N6 Trade Item 311 5 Length or first dimension metres Variable N4 N6 Measure Trade Item 312 Width diameter or second dimension N4 N6 metres Variable Measure Trade Item 313 Depth thickness height or third dimension N4 N6 metres Variable Measure Trade Item 314 Area square metres Variable Measure Trade N4 N6 Item 315 Net volume litres Variable Measure Trade N4 N6 Item 316 Net volume cubic metres Variable Measure N4 N6 Trade Item 320 Net weight pounds Variable Measure Trade N4 N6 Item 321 gt Length or first dimension inches Variable N4 N6 Measure Trade Item 129 ESKOS 130 a TA A UM ES T aes or 330 5 331 332 333 348 349 350 351 5 352 Length or first dimension feet Variable Measure Trade Item Length or first dimensi
90. N4 N6 N4 N6 N4 N6 N4 N6 N4 N6 N4 N6 N4 N6 N4 N6 N4 N6 N4 N6 N4 N6 N4 N6 N4 N6 N4 N6 N4 N6 N4 N6 N4 N6 N4 N6 LDeskPack Advanced DeskPack Advanced 353 5 Area square inches N4 N6 354 Area square feet N4 N6 355 Area square yards N4 N6 356 Net weight troy ounces Variable Measure N4 N6 Trade Item 357 Net weight or volume ounces Variable N4 N6 Measure Trade Item 360 Net volume quarts Variable Measure Trade N4 N6 Item 361 Net volume gallons U S Variable Measure N4 N6 Trade Item 362 Logistic volume quarts N4 N6 363 Logistic volume gallons U S N4 N6 364 Net volume cubic inches Variable Measure N4 N6 Trade Item 365 Net volume cubic feet Variable Measure N4 N6 Trade Item 366 Net volume cubic yards Variable Measure N4 N6 Trade Item 367 Logistic volume cubic inches N4 N6 368 Logistic volume cubic feet N4 N6 369 Logistic volume cubic yards N4 N6 37 Count of Trade Items N2 N 8 FNC 1 390 Applicable Amount Payable or Coupon N4 N 15 FNC1 Value local currency 391 5 Applicable Amount Payable with ISO N4 N3 N 15 FNC 1 Currency Code 392 Applicable Amount Payable single monetary N4 N 15 FNC1 area Variable Measure Trade Item 393 Applicable Amount Payable with ISO N4 N3 4N 15 FNC1 Currency Code Variable Measure Trade Item 400 Customer s Purchase Order Number N3 X 30 FNC1
91. Note If you do not specify Dot Gain In Highlights you will not be able to use the following Viewer viewing mode Flexo Print Preview Limited Total Area Coverage The Total Area Coverage is the sum of percentages of the different channels on the same location A higher total area coverage means more of the various inks is printed on top of each other If you want you can specify the Maximum Total Area Coverage to specify the maximum amount of ink that the substrate can take on the same spot on your press Note Exceeding the Maximum Total Area Coverage for the press may cause drying problems unexpected color results and other problems Registration Error Specifies the average maximum Registration Error on your press If you enable this option in the Press Settings you can use the Registration Errors preview in Viewer to check whether your trapping is sufficient to compensate for possible registration errors on the press Moir Settings In the Moir Detection settings of the Press Settings you can define the default values for the settings in the Moir Detection window For more info on the different settings see Moire Detection on page 295 14 3 Generate the Preview Before you can use Viewer you have to generate a preview of the current document based on your specific Press Settings After you make changes to the document you need to update the preview This is reflected in the Viewer palette the Generate button ch
92. OS c POR a E S K O x DeskPack Advanced Contents PE S oie a NOICE eet entre tenner a cnn ene er E O E ere ee eee 8 2 About DeskPack AdValiICOBG sicaieibid Disdesai oq imn pA grana hut paEAN RA nap atu EEEE 10 SPI NE e E m c 11 Su ER Gre es 0 16 RUM 1 Cl NNI OT TETTE 11 3 2 Introduction to Data Exchange sss eene 12 3 2 1 Data Exchange Preferences sss eee 12 3 3 The PDF criscq uusie C ee 13 omo M Lole DEE nM 13 3 3 2 Saving a File as Normalized PDF eene nennen 13 S9 d iInked AMIOSCAD GrapriiCS suco bui DIETER EHOLHRILOU D durH Edi M detain meine E AU RURUN 21 9 4 The Ink Manager PIBUG IDi rite gon tene A ERE ER Ced PHP necu tuba Late SPUR t uU SR cn 21 3 4 1 Using the Ink Manager palette ssssssssese enne nennen nennen 21 CERIS ed NO ULT eee eee 22 3 4 3 The Ink Manager flyout menu ssssssseeeeeen nennen nennen enn 23 3 4 4 Printing Method seen nennen enne eene einen enin 25 OF RR 8 8 ero UP o MRNA RR DR 26 3 4 6 INK Mangadgsr PrefereriBS ucenuneue itum iaiecbr vtri eniidadun cipit us Che IERd Am eterno fran ea iaa li 2f CN NI Known Ig iie RE Omm 28 3 5 The otmictural Design PIEGSIPICG t trtbd bore Pado tab sabe satan b Re OA Iud iE Nu eR mI MENT 28 eB ITEM OU rset RR o o ooo m 28 3 5 2 Structural Design Import eee nennen nnne 29 3 5 0 wlt ctural Design EXPO resinae ost eri repite ED ett HER e rtis amo otc 4
93. Repeat the grid mark every Row or Column every 2 rows ect The examples underneath shows a 5 by 5 repeat with staggering The Position is always centered at the left side Outer Left Column Outer Right Column Outer Left Cell no repeat Outer Left Cell repeat every 1 rows DeskPack Advanced ES Outer Left Cell repeat every 2 rows Symbol allows to change the symbol used for the Gradation Strip Mark See Changing the Symbol on page 201 White Underprint see White Underprint on page 212 Corner Mark Properties Corner Marks are created from a symbol named CornerMark DYNAMIC MARKS PROPERTIES Position Attach to Trim Box B H 0 mm n vp Color Registration n Cal Include Technical Inks Corner Mark Horizontal Offset 8 mm T Vertical Offset 8 mm g Bounding Box Corners or Repetition Corners 199 ES E S K O x DeskPack Advanced 200 Using the buttons you can define if you want corner marks on the bounding box of the selected Attach To area or on the corners of every one up This option is only available if you attached the corner mark to a Repeat Grid Set Symbol allows to change the symbol used for the Gradation Strip Mark See Changing the Symbol on page 201 Offset allows to define the offset between the corner and the corner mark If the lock is enabled vertical and horizontal offset are kept the same If the lock is disabled yo
94. Servers verifies if linked images are already on fileservers and if they are not copies them along with the exported Normalized PDF file Choosing this option also enables the File Servers button where you add the machines that store linked images so that Esko workflow servers can find them For more information see What is a Server Mapping and Adding a Server Mapping OPI and Server Mapping When you click Settings in the OPI and Server Mapping group of the PDF Export Preferences dialog of Data Exchange Preferences the OPI and Server Mapping dialog appears OPI And Server Mapping Servers OPI Mapping Preview Mapping Note This dialog is available only when you have chosen to Save Links in exported Normalized PDF files When you export a Normalized PDF OPI Mapping is applied first and then Server Mapping 15 ESKO NEM 16 Servers The top pane of the dialog configures Server Mappings You need to use Server Mappings when the Normalized PDF you output e has linked images that are located on a different machine file server e will be used on another machine not your local machine or the file server Server Mappings allow you to map the image links from one share name to another automatically on output This ensures that the links are not broken when the Normalized PDF is used on another machine For example e thelinked images are saved ona file server called Server in a shared folder ca
95. There are no warranties granted or extended by this document Furthermore Esko Software BVBA does not warrant guarantee or make any representations regarding the use or the results of the use of the software or the information contained herein Esko Software BVBA shall not be liable for any direct indirect consequential or incidental damages arising out of the use or inability to use the software or the information contained herein The information contained herein is subject to change without notice Revisions may be issued from time to time to advise of such changes and or additions No part of this document may be reproduced stored in a data base or retrieval system or published in any form or in any way electronically mechanically by print photoprint microfilm or any other means without prior written permission from Esko Software BVBA This document supersedes all previous dated versions PANTONE PantoneLIVE and other Pantone trademarks are the property of Pantone LLC All other trademarks or registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners Pantone is a wholly owned subsidiary of X Rite Incorporated 9 Pantone LLC 2015 All rights reserved This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group Portions of this software are copyright 9 1996 2002 The FreeType Project www freetype org All rights reserved Portions of this software are copyright 2006 Feeling Software copyright 2005 2006
96. Underprint ink please do so directly in the Swatch library 15 6 Include White Objects The Include White Objects option can be set by selecting Options from the fly out menu of the White Underprint palette If the option is disabled default no White Underprint is generated for white objects colored with CMYK 0 0 0 0 By selecting the option those objects will also get a White Underprint 307
97. When a linked image has process CMYK colors spot colors and a mask Illustrator s default behavior is to apply the mask only to the CMYK channels and put the spot color channels in Multiply blending and unmasked Channel Mapping preserves this behavior 5 8 Making an Image Overprint You can use Channel Mapping to set your images to overprint e To do this enable the Overprint checkbox at the bottom of the Channel Mapping palette You don t need to click Apply 5 9 Using Ink Tints With Channel Mapping you can use Ink Tints in your image To change the tint of an ink in your image do the following 1 Go to the Tint column in the Channel Mapping palette and edit the tint percentage 102 2 Click Apply Channel Mapping x p Mame H Overprint inks Mapto Tt O Process Cyan Process Cyan 100 m Process Magenta Process Magenta 50 Process Yellow Process Yellow 100 Process Black Process Black 100 Apply Rewert DeskPack Advanced 103 5 ES E S K O x DeskPack Advanced 6 Color Engine 6 1 Copyright Notice 104 Copyright 2015 Esko Software BVBA Gent Belgium All rights reserved This material information and instructions for use contained herein are the property of Esko Software BVBA The material information and instructions are provided on an AS IS basis without warranty of any kind There are no warranties granted or extended by this doc
98. X 3 N4 N 10 N4 X 2 Number of Processor with ISO Country Code N4 N3 X 27 National Healthcare Reimbursement Number N3 X 20 NHRN Germany PZN National Healthcare Reimbursement Number N3 X 20 NHRN France CIP National Healthcare Reimbursement Number N3 X 20 NHRN Spain CN National Healthcare Reimbursement Number N3 X 20 NHRN Brasil DRN Roll Products Width Length Core Diameter N4 N14 Direction Splices Cellular Mobile Telephone Identifier Global Returnable Asset Identifier GRAI Global Individual Asset Identifier GIAI Price Per Unit of Measure Identification of the Components of a Trade Item International Bank Account Number IBAN Date and Time of Production Component Part Identifier CPID Component Part Identifier Serial Number CPID SERIAL N4 X 20 N4 N14 X 16 N4 X 30 N4 N6 N4 N14 N2 N2 N4 X 34 N4 N8 N 4 N4 X 30 N4 N 12 FNC1 FNC1 CH ters ens a a a L wA uw LL ZZZ 055556589 TI Se S SNS SNS SNe SNe Noe DeskPack Advanced 8017 Global Service Relation Number to identify N4 N18 FNC1 the relationship between an organisation offering services and the provider of services 8018 Global Service Relation Number to identify N4 N18 FNC1 the relationship between an organisation offering services and the recipient of services 8019 Service Relation Instance Number SRIN N44 N 10 FNC 1 8020 Payment Slip Reference Number N4 X
99. abar About this Barcode The Codabar barcode is commonly used in libraries blood banks and the air parcel business It can encode up to 126 characters of data and two control characters using digits and the and characters Parameters General Parameters e Rotation on page 170 e Code on page 170 Text Parameters e Add Human Readable Characters on page 171 e Font Family Style and Size on page 172 e Alignment on page 173 195 ESKO NEM 196 e Vertical Offset on page 173 Additional Parameters e Rational Constant Bar Width By enabling this option you can create a Rational Codabar bar code e Use 992 Prod Family in UPC on page 173 e Bar Width Reduction on page 174 e Device Compensation on page 174 e Height on page 175 e Characters per unit on page 175 e Ratio on page 177 e Narrow Bar on page 177 e Snap Bars to Output Resolution on page 178 e Box on page 181 Code 128 About this Barcode Code 128 is a variable length high density alohanumeric barcode It has the second highest density of all the 1D barcodes after the GS1 Databar Expanded It can contain a set of control characters These control characters can change the character encoding type In the absence of control characters the encoding type is chosen automatically to optimize the content encoding To force the usage of the code set A precede your data with the a control character To force
100. ack Advanced Channel Mapping x Mame i Overprint inks apt Tt Process Cyan Mask 100 a Process Magenta Process Magenta 100 Process Yellow Process Yellow 100 a Process Black Process Black 160 e To remap a mask to an ink remove it completely a Select your image b In the Channel Mapping palette remap your mask to your chosen ink to None c Click Apply 5 2 Linked Images If your linked image has a mask you can remove it and restore it You cannot map inks to a mask for linked images If your linked image doesn t have a mask you cannot create one e To remove the mask from the image a Select your image b In the Channel Mapping palette remap the mask to None Channel Mapping x Mame Q2 CMYK Alpha psd E Overprint inks apt Tt 8 O Process Cyan Process Cyan 100 Process Magenta gt Process Magenta 100 Process Yellow Process Yellow 100 Process Black Process Black 100 Mask Mask 100 ES Mask Fa None Apply m Revert c Click Apply 101 ESKO NEM Channel Mapping x Mame Q2 CMYK Alpha psd Overprint ks apt Process Cyan C gt Process Cyan Process Magenta C gt Process Magenta Process Yellow Process Yellow E Process Black z Process Black Mask None e To restore the mask map it back to Mask Aloha Channel Special Considerations
101. ademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and or other countries Microsoft and the Microsoft logo are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries SolidWorks is a registered trademark of SolidWorks Corporation DeskPack Advanced Portions of this software are owned by Spatial Corp 1986 2003 All Rights Reserved JDF and the JDF logo are trademarks of the CIP4 Organisation Copyright 2001 The International Cooperation for the Integration of Processes in Prepress Press and Postpress CIP4 All rights reserved The Esko software contains the RSA Data Security Inc MD5 Message Digest Algorithm Java and all Java based trademarks and logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems in the U S and other countries Part of this software uses technology by BestTM Color Technology EFI EFI and Bestcolor are registered trademarks of Electronics For Imaging GmbH in the U S Patent and Trademark Office Contains PowerNest library Copyrighted and Licensed by Alma 2005 2007 All other product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners Correspondence regarding this publication should be forwarded to Esko Software BVBA Kortrijksesteenweg 1095 B 9051 Gent info eur esko com 5 2 Inks remapping in Channel Mapping With Channel Mapping you can remap inks in CMYK images that are either embedded or placed in your Illustrator do
102. age it may be because you accidentally selected other objects too To have a better control over which image s you select you can select it them from Illustrator s Layers palette or use the Go To Link button in Illustrator s Links palette SS x Layers x ha lt Path gt oO H Y lt Group gt Oa NE eee Zn z hi ie oaceae 2 k d E lt Group gt Om 2 M L1 Clipping Path gt Oo f clas Pai ee x Salsa esl Clipping Path gt Oo Clipping Path O v D Ha a ow iz 5 5 Remapping Inks 5 5 1 Remapping an Ink 1 Select the CMYK image you want to remap in your Illustrator Document 96 5 DeskPack Advanced To make sure you select only the image select it from lllustrator s Layers palette or use the Go To Link button in lllustrator s Links palette 2 Goto Window Esko Channel Mapping This opens the Channel Mapping palette It shows the inks used in your image in the Inks column and allows you to map them to other inks using the Map to column Channel Mapping X Mame Overprint mas Mat rm Process Cyan E Process Cyan ion Process Magenta Process Magenta 100 E Process Yellow Process Yellow 100 I Process Black E Process Black 100 3 To remap an ink click on its name in the Map to column and select another ink in the drop down list Channel Mapping X Mame E Overprint inks E T Tm a Process Cyan
103. age 173 e Vertical Offset on page 173 Additional Parameters e Bar Width Reduction on page 174 e Device Compensation on page 174 e Magnification on page 174 e Height on page 175 e Narrow Bar on page 177 e Snap Bars to Output Resolution on page 178 e Box on page 181 GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional About this Barcode Barcodes of the GS1 DataBar family formerly Reduced Space Symbols or RSS can identify small items and encode more information than the current EAN or UPC barcodes They can include GS1 Application Identifiers such as serial numbers lot numbers expiration dates Note GS1 DataBar codes are expected to replace most common EAN and UPC barcodes from 2010 GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional encodes Global Trade Item Numbers GTIN in a linear symbol that can be scanned omnidirectionally by suitably programmed slot scanners 01200000000000000 DeskPack Advanced Parameters General Parameters e Rotation on page 170 e Code on page 170 e Composite Component on page 171 Text Parameters e Add Human Readable Characters on page 171 e Puton Top on page 172 e Multiple Text Lines on page 172 e Font Family Style and Size on page 172 e Alignment on page 173 e Vertical Offset on page 173 Additional Parameters e Bar Width Reduction on page 174 e Device Compensation on page 174 e Narrow Bar on page 177 e Snap Bars to Output Resolution on page 178 GS1 DataBar Stacked About this Barcode GS1 DataBar Stac
104. age 178 137 ESKO NEM 138 e Box on page 181 Code 39 About this Barcode Code 39 is a popular barcode in industrial barcoding systems mainly in the U S A It is used in the non retail industry particularly in the manufacturing military and health sectors It can encode alphanumeric data TT Parameters General Parameters e Rotation on page 170 e Code on page 170 Text Parameters e Add Human Readable Characters on page 171 e Font Family Style and Size on page 172 e Alignment on page 173 e Vertical Offset on page 173 Additional Parameters e Bar Width Reduction on page 174 e Device Compensation on page 174 e Height on page 175 e Characters per unit on page 175 e Ratio on page 177 e Narrow Bar on page 177 e Snap Bars to Output Resolution on page 178 e Add Check Digit on page 179 e Box on page 181 DataMatrix About this Barcode DataMatrix is used for encoding large amounts of alphanumeric data and or marking small objects It can encode all the standard ASCII and extended ASCII characters DeskPack Advanced The DataMatrix symbol size can adjust automatically depending on the amount of data Dynamic Barcodes doesn t generate human readable characters for DataMatrix symbols The data to be encoded in a DataMatrix symbol can contain an FNC1 character but only at the beginning of the data Note Dynamic Barcodes always generates DataMatrix symbols with the recommended ECC200 error correction sch
105. amic Marks gt Dynamic Mark Properties The existing text is static which means it won t change when you use the Mark into another document or if the document changes You can make all or part of the text dynamic to have it change with every document you use your mark into x Dynamic Marks Properties Position Attach to Trim Box H 3 625 mm t 24 893 mm LEE w Color Dynamic Include Technical Inks w Text Date Date Filename File Name Tz f Insert Modify White Underprint re z j d White Underprint Ink Settings oe DEMNM Note If you want to have some static text just leave that part of the text as it is or type in new text in the Text area 3 To get dynamic text you need to insert dynamic fields Place your cursor where you want the field to be or select the text to replace with a field and click the Insert Modify button 4 In the Insert Field dialog that opens choose the fields to insert ZZ LDeskPack Advanced a Select Local Variables to select variables from the local file or Server Variables to use omartNames from the Automation Engine server In that case all Database queries defined on the server will be available as well as all job and product parameters b choose a field Category for example Barcodes Date amp Time C in that Category choose the Field you want to use see Categories and Types on page 203 for a list o
106. an manually change the Profile Disable the checkbox in front of a Dynamic Art placeholder to stop using it as an Inspection box 3 4 Import and Export 62 When exporting normalized PDF Inspection points and boxes added to a job are saved in the PDF file and these Inspection points and boxes will be recognized by Packadge and AE Also when opening a normalized PDF from another Esko product such as PackEdge the Inspection points and boxes information stored in the PDF document will be shown in the Inspection Setup palette 3 LDeskPack Advanced Note Dynamic Art placeholders are not saved as such in normalized PDF The selected Dynamic Art placeholders will be exported as Inspection Box If you import the normalized PDF in Adobe Illustrator again or open the normalized PDF file in e g Packedge these Dynamic Art placeholders will be shown as Inspection Boxes 3 8 Messages The Messages plug in is included with all Esko DeskPack plug ins It displays the information warnings and errors from all the other DeskPack plug ins and tells you which plug in generated them You can filter the messages you see when the Messages palette is open and clear or save all messages if you need to 3 8 1 The Messages Palette The Messages palette pops up automatically when another DeskPack plug in generates a warning or an error You can also open it from Window Esko Messages MESSAGES p The ink Process Cyan h
107. an object with an Appearance with reversed order is selected Fill Stroke instead of Stroke Fill e ifamix of gradient and non gradient objects are selected e if the Appearance palette has fills or strokes but not all of them are in overprint Only the last fill or stroke can be overprinting or not e if the gradient sliders are not in the exact same position in the selection or in the multiple fills in the Appearance palette 4 4 Split Join Fill amp Stroke The Split Fill amp Stroke filter separates a selected object s Fill from its Stroke This filter can be used for modifying trapping options and working with chokes and spreads for printer color registration To use Split Fill amp Stroke Select an object with a fill and stroke Choose Object Path boostX Split Fill amp Stroke The filter will separate the object s fill and stroke into two distinct objects one with a fill no stroke and the other with a stroke no fill Using the Join Fill amp Stroke Filter The Join Fill amp Stroke filter combines previously Split Fill and Stroke of an object To use Join Fill amp Stroke Choose Object gt Path gt boostX Join Fill amp Stroke The Join Fill amp Stroke filter will search the document for split objects The filter then joins the objects fill and stroke into one object having one stroke and one fill The Fill amp Stroke filters work on all objects including text as in our example Applying the Split Fil
108. anges to the Update button e Click the Generate or Update button to render a Viewer preview on your computer The preview is displayed in the Viewer palette once the rendering finishes You can also use the shortcuts e Command option V Mac or Control option V Windows to open the Viewer window 200 IBj ESKO LDeskPack Advanced e Command shift 7 Mac or Control shift 7 Windows to generate update the Viewer preview 14 3 1 Navigating in the Preview 200 The Viewer window shows the preview of your document in the left pane and the list of used inks in the right pane of your Viewer palette At the bottom of the palette you will find O Zan Ee c k 1 a zoom in and zoom out button and a dropdown menu with several zoom percentages and two extra zoom factors fit artboard and fit graphics 2 azoom link button When in link mode the Viewer window will reflect what your Adobe Illustrator Document window does 3 a Densitometer see Measure Ink Densities on page 288 Measure tool see Measure Tool on page 288 and Zoom tool see below 1 aPan tool see below a Zoom tool see below and a Densitometer tool see Measure Ink Densities on page 288 2 a zoom in and zoom out button and a field showing the current zoom percentage 3 the Refresh button 4 the Minimize button Zoom in zoom out To zoom in the preview pane of the Viewer palette select the zoom tool and just click and the vie
109. anty of any kind There are no warranties granted or extended by this document Furthermore Esko Software BVBA does not warrant guarantee or make any representations regarding the use or the results of the use of the software or the information contained herein Esko Software BVBA shall not be liable for any direct indirect consequential or incidental damages arising out of the use or inability to use the software or the information contained herein The information contained herein is subject to change without notice Revisions may be issued from time to time to advise of such changes and or additions No part of this document may be reproduced stored in a data base or retrieval system or published in any form or in any way electronically mechanically by print photoprint microfilm or any other means without prior written permission from Esko Software BVBA This document supersedes all previous dated versions PANTONE PantoneLIVE and other Pantone trademarks are the property of Pantone LLC All other trademarks or registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners Pantone is a wholly owned subsidiary of X Rite Incorporated 9 Pantone LLC 2015 All rights reserved This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group Portions of this software are copyright 9 1996 2002 The FreeType Project www freetype org All rights reserved Portions of this software are copyright 2006 Feeling Software c
110. ap When there is no underlying image data the image isn t clipped it will create an empty trap 241 10 DeskPack Advanced Softmasks When trapping objects with softmasks traps will stop at the edge of the softmask as you can see below This is because Instant Trapper treats the softmask as a single object Patterns When trapping patterned objects Instant Trapper will treat each individual pattern as a separate object 242 DeskPack Advanced Tip With the Trap to Objects tool draw a rectangle around the whole patterned object before trapping it to another object See Trapping Several Objects to One Objecton page 236 for more details Strokes Strokes in the Same Color as the Fill When an object has a stroke it is not possible to trap its fill to other objects in the background because the stroke is in between When the stroke has the same color as the fill it may not be immediately visible either in Preview or in Outline view so it may not be obvious to you why Instant Trapper won t trap the fill to other objects in the background i Messages X l Hx pow Message 1 jPugn Tm No common edge could be found for trapping Instant Trapper B 42 43 Show All Speed Database Synchronization When trapping a document for the first time drawing the first trap Instant Trapper needs to synchronize its internal database This may c
111. ar on film you can switch to Show as Film Positive By switching to Show as Film Negative the visible separation will be shown in negative Note As both Show as Film Positive and Show as Film Negative are only useful on a single separation the Mode radio buttons are disabled if more than one separation is shown Highlight Transparency This will highlight all objects that have an opacity percentage a blend mode or an opacity mask regardless of what is underneath 289 my ESKOG DDeskPack Advanced Overprint Highlight Overprint will highlight the areas where an overprint setting in the paint style takes effect Screening Conflict The Screening Conflict checkbox highlights areas where a screening conflict can occur They can occur if an object with transparency opacity mask opacity percentage or blend mode is overlapping on an object with another screening The PDF definition clearly states that screening is always taken from the topmost object even if that object is completely transparent in some areas In most cases this is not what you would expect In the example underneath you can see a cyan rectangle and a circle on top with an opacity mask The objects have a different screening Where the circle is on top of the cyan rectangle the cyan will take the screening of the blended circle Therefore as shown on the right these areas will be highlighted as Screen Conflict Color When you e
112. arameters that can be specified for checking The window is divided in tabs e Color on page 257 color and or ink related settings e mage on page 259 external image settings e Line on page 259 line width and other line settings e Font on page 259 text setttings e Other on page 261 miscellaneous settings Each tab can be enabled disabled The bottom of the dialog contains the current parameter set name and a hint whether this set has been modified or not if modified the name is suffixed with a sign The Revert button at the bottom right restores the saved parameter settings from the current set Many parameters or parameter groups have an info button at the right side of the dialog box Clicking this button opens a text entry dialog where user information related to that particular parameter can be entered When the Preflight for Illustrator Custom User Help Info Dialog Box has opened clicking inside the text window allows you to add or edit text Clicking the OK button stores the text to the current parameter set while clicking Cancel disregards the changes The info can be seen either by clicking the info button or in the info window of the Validator when the appropriate rule is selected 12 LDeskPack Advanced Preflight Custom User Help Lal Please make sure we have customer approval before going to press John Doe 1 a regards 7 Cancel OK E O O M The Info Dialog Box can b
113. are invalid for the given barcode type You will need to change the parameters in the Job Setup Note that after correcting the parameters you need to manually reconnect the barcode by enabling Get Properties from Job Setup 185 ES E S K O x DeskPack Advanced o Dynamic Marks 8 1 Copyright Notice 186 Copyright 2015 Esko Software BVBA Gent Belgium All rights reserved This material information and instructions for use contained herein are the property of Esko Software BVBA The material information and instructions are provided on an AS IS basis without warranty of any kind There are no warranties granted or extended by this document Furthermore Esko Software BVBA does not warrant guarantee or make any representations regarding the use or the results of the use of the software or the information contained herein Esko Software BVBA shall not be liable for any direct indirect consequential or incidental damages arising out of the use or inability to use the software or the information contained herein The information contained herein is subject to change without notice Revisions may be issued from time to time to advise of such changes and or additions No part of this document may be reproduced stored in a data base or retrieval system or published in any form or in any way electronically mechanically by print photoprint microfilm or any other means without prior written permission from Esko Software BVBA This d
114. as different settings than the ane from the 1 Up document PowerLayout Standalone 14 25 37 o checkdigit amp Dynamic Barcodes 14 26 30 correct code is 1234567890128 Dynamic Barcodes 14 28 30 e Check color used Dynamic Barcodes 14 28 30 e 13 or 15 or 18 digits required Dynamic Barcodes 14 26 19 e 13 or 15 or 18 digits required Dynamic Barcodes 14 28 18 5 The link CansumptionContext ServingSize Lacale en LS is missing Dynamic Tables 14 27 58 Extra Info 13 or 15 ar 18 digits required Show All This palette shows you the message s severity Q information D warning or error e the messages text in the Message column e which Plugin generated the message e the Time the message was generated at Tip You can click the column headers to sort the messages and drag the columns horizontally to adjust their widths You can also use the palette to get extra information and or select the objects that generated warnings or errors e click a message to display extra information at the bottom of the palette 63 ESKO NEM D O Font Helvetica Condensed Bold is missing Al Synchronize D ar Font Helvetica Condensed is missing Al Synchronize Extra Info Font Helvetica Condensed Bold is missing Text will use another font This may change the text flow e click the triangle in front of a message to see the list of objects it relates to M Ce Font Halvetica Condensed Bold is missing Object 1 Object 2 e click one of the objects
115. ased on Document Size will result in a low resolution for big documents so e g aligning will become more difficult when zooming in On the other hand a Fixed Resolution can result in a very heavy preview calculation if the fixed resolution is high and the document is large You can define if anti aliasing should be applied 14 7 Ink Coverage 302 With Ink Coverage you can calculate the ink usage for every ink 1 Click Window Esko Viewer Ink Coverage to open the Ink Coverage dialog DDeskPack Advanced Ink Coverage Scan Current Artboard HH 9 Process Cyan 23340 7 mm Process Magenta 22147 0 mm _ Process Yellow 39037 3 mm B Process Black 8859 2 mm B PANTONE 300 C 0 0 mm Save as XML lll PANTONE 7546 C 77383 0 mm PANTONE 583 C 147468 4 mm pa Close ee 2 In the dropdown select the area you want to scan By default Ink Coverage is calculated on the Current Artboard 3 Click Calculate For every separation the size in square mm or square inch and percentage of the total surface is shown Note By setting the Densitometer Mode to Rounded in the Viewer preferences the values in the Ink Coverage palette will be rounded off 4 Click Save as XML to save the result of the Ink Coverage calculation into an XML file 5 Click Close to close the Ink Coverage dialog Note Technical inks will not be presented in the list nor in the exported XML 308 14
116. ate a CMYK Illustrator document and go to Windows gt Esko gt Dynamic Barcodes 111 ESKOS This opens the Dynamic Barcodes dialog LDeskPack Advanced Dynamic Barcodes Barcode Type CODE 128 v E Rotation Code gt Text parameters gt Additional parameters Get Properties from Job Setup 2 Define the color of the barcode in your Illustrator color palette define a single color fill style and no stroke p M x Color X Color Guide 1 b a md Y ee K m 100 3 Enter the barcode parameters Barcode Type numeric Code in the Dynamic Barcodes dialog For example for an EAN 13 barcode select EAN 13 as Barcode Type and enter a 13 digit Code Barcode Type i Rotation Code 1486745874546 4 Click the Create button and Dynamic Barcodes will generate the barcode in your document 112 DeskPack Advanced Dynamic Barcodes e Barcode Type EAN 13 v E Code gt Text parameters gt Additional parameters Get Properties from Job Setup 1 4 Using Dynamic Barcodes in Unlicensed Mode If you don t have a license for the Dynamic Barcodes plug in you still use it in unlicensed mode to perform limited operations You can e Open documents containing barcodes created by Dynamic Barcodes without warning me
117. ause some delay for larger files Note Instant Trapper uses the same internal database as the EskoArtwork viewX plug in This means that if you have already synchronized the database using viewX by generating a preview Instant Trapper won t need to do it for the same document and vice versa 1 bit Images You may experience speed issues when trapping complex 1 bit images for example image masks 243 1 0 S K O Gy DeskPack Advanced 244 Progress Window When trapping big and complex files you may get a progress window and the cancel button in the progress window may sometimes not be immediately responsive Tip To cancel a trap in this situation use the Escape key Blend Modes Objects with Blend Modes When trapping objects containing blend modes the traps will be flattened but the visual result will be the same Text Vectorizable Text Instant Trapper can only trap live text if the text s font is vectorizable in Illustrator DeskPack Advanced 11 PDF Import 11 1 Copyright Notice Copyright 2015 Esko Software BVBA Gent Belgium All rights reserved This material information and instructions for use contained herein are the property of Esko Software BVBA The material information and instructions are provided on an AS IS basis without warranty of any kind There are no warranties granted or extended by this document Furthermore Esko Software BVBA does not warrant guarantee or make any represen
118. ay have a gap between the traps at the boundary between the second orange and the third purple objects e When using Combined Trapping to perform both traps at once there is no gap at the boundary between the second and the third objects z 09 10 DeskPack Advanced Note To know how to perform Combined Trapping see Trapping using Combined Traps on page 240 Trapping using Combined Traps e With the Trap to Objects tool a Click into the first object b hold Shift c drag the arrow into the second object to spread hold Option to choke and click e Still holding Shift a click again into the first object b drag the arrow into the third object to spread hold Option to choke and click e Release Shift This traps the first object to both the second and the third objects 240 DeskPack Advanced 10 7 Known Limitations Images OPI Images Instant Trapper doesn t support OPI images Foreign Art Instant Trapper does not support certain types of objects created in other applications for example complex gradients You will get a warning message when trying to trap a foreign art object 1 Message Center x a weMesage Pugin 3S Time Foreign art has been ignared for trapping Instant Trapper 16 33 52 Show All Non Clipped Images When spreading an image Instant Trapper uses the underlying image data when the image is clipped to create the tr
119. bject but values below the minimum 96 will be bumped up to the minimum value e Clip to minimum 9 a gradient will be added to the White Underprint layer The gradient will follow the same density as the original object but values below the minimum 96 will be clipped to 096 15 5 White Underprint Ink The Ink used for White Underprint can be defined by selecting Options from the fly out menu of the White Underprint palette and entering the name of the Ink to be used for White Underprint In case the defined ink doesn t exist yet a new spot color will be added to the swatches using the Ink name and the Color patch When the name of an existing swatch is entered this ink will be used for White Underprint Note White Underprint can only use Spot Colors If an existing swatch name is entered and the swatch is not a spot color a warning will be generated A swatch by this name already exists but is not defined as a Spot Color Multiple White Underprint inks can be used in 1 document After you ve applied White Underprint using a first ink just change the name and color patch of the White Underprint ink in the Options dialog As of then any new White Underprint objects will be generated using the new White Underprint ink Note In order to prevent changes to existing White Underprint objects be sure not to have any active selections while changing the White Underprint ink If you wish to modify the color values of the existing White
120. by selecting Window gt Esko gt Color Engine gt Replace Ink or by clicking the Replace Ink button in the Ink Manager eoo Current Inks and Colors Process Cyan Process Magenta LI Process Yellow A Process Black _ PANTONE Blue 0821 C PANTONE 233 C lll PANTONE 7671 C Details gj PANTONE 233 C Ink Book l PANTONE Solid Coated Ink Type Spectral Reflection Defined Ink L 44 1 a 74 8 b 9 9 Wi Include images Replace Ink Replace Ink Replace Selected Color by A Document Ink ki E Process Cyan L Process Magenta L Process Yellow Process Black PANTONE Blue 0821 C Bl PANTONE 233 C lll PANTONE 7671 C Al Hide unused inks 2 In the Current Inks and Colors select the Ink you want to replace 107 S K O X DeskPack Advanced Inks defined in an Ink book will have a droplet icon next to their name Using the option you can choose if you want to Hide unused inks from the list The Details window will show extra information on the selected ink 3 Define the Replace by type e Replace by A Document Ink allows to select an Ink from the document inks By enabling Include Unused Inks all spot color inks from the swatch list will be available even the inks that aren t used in the job e Replace by CMYK Color allows to convert the selected ink into its CMYK equivalent The CMYK values that will be used are shown underneath Replace Selected Color by CMYK Color
121. cess Magenta Process Magenta 100 Process Yellow Process Yellow 100 Process Black Process Black 100 2 Remap your inks as explained in Remapping an Ink on page 96 When you click Apply it applies your changes to all selected images 99 s DeskPack Advanced Channel Mapping x zx Name buddha and light tif rase tif H Qverprint pinks Mato tS Process Cyan gt Process Cyan 100 Process Magenta lime green 100 Process Yellow Process Yellow 100 Process Black Process Black 160 o Remapping Images with Masks 5 1 Embedded Images With embedded images you can remap any ink to a mask to use it as an alpha channel whether the original image had a mask or not If your embedded image has a mask you can remove it by remapping it None or to an ink Note You can only have one ink mapped as a mask in your image e To remap an ink to a mask a Select your image To make sure you select only the image select it from Illustrators Layers palette or use the Go To Link button in Illustrator s Links palette b In the Channel Mapping palette remap your chosen ink to Mask X Channel Mapping x Name H Overprint Ins Mato Tt Process Cyan al Process Cyan 100 Process Magenta E Process Cyan 100 Process Yellow 100 Process Black 7 N 100 one Apply Rewert c Click Apply 100 s DeskP
122. ch contains 3 text fields set to the short ink name the ruling and angle and the index Note When you create a symbol for Color Patch using exact the same variable names case sensitive Dynamic Marks will automatically use these variables This way you can quickly create a Color Patch symbol with working variable text fields Changing the Symbol You can change the Symbol used for a Standard Mark in the Dynamic Mark Properties by clicking the Set Symbol button and selecting the desired Symbol from the list To change or add Symbols 1 In the Dynamic Marks palette select Open Symbol Library from the fly out menu The file DynamicMarks ai CS5 orDynamicMarks CS6 ai CS6 will be opened 2 Open the Illustrator Symbol Library by choosing Window gt Symbols and use the Illustrator tools to add edit remove duplicate the symbols defined in the file 3 Save and close the DynamicMarks file The new and modified symbols will now be available when clicking Set Symbol in the Dynamic Mark Properties 201 ES E S KO x DeskPack Advanced Text Mark properties A Text Mark is a Custom Mark created from a text object Text Marks can consist of static and dynamic text 1 Create a text object using the font and text settings you want to use and add it as a Custom Mark For more info on adding obejcts as Mark see Adding objects as Mark on page 190 2 Open the Dynamic Mark Properties palette by choosing Window gt Esko gt Dyn
123. ct Overprinting Objects Inverse bX Select Overprinting White Objects E bX Select Uncolored Art doge auc M38 Select By Attributes Next Object Below X a amp m i Same The filter will search the drawing document and select the objects which are the same size by area or smaller Select Overprinting Objects bX Select Overprinting Objects The bX Select Overprinting Objects searches your document for objects that are in overprint Click Select Esko bX Select Overprinting Objects and all objects in overprint will be selected Select White Overprinting Objects bX Select White Overprinting Objects The bX Select White Overprinting Objects searches your document for objects which fill or stroke is white all inks 096 and overprintring Click Select gt Esko gt bX Select White Overprinting Objects and all objects with a fill or stroke that is white and overprinting will be selected Select Uncolored Art The bX Select Uncolored Art selection filter searches your document for objects that have no fill color or stroke color assigned to them LDeskPack Advanced Click Select Esko bX Select Uncolored Art and all objects without a fill color and stroke color will be selected Select by Attributes The Select by Attributes option opens the Select by Attributes palette from which you can define a custom selection filter based on the attributes of the objects in the Illustrator document Select By Attribute
124. cts You can use it for more complex trapping for example when part of an object has to spread to another object while another part has to be choked by a third object e The Trap to All tool enables you to do fast simple interactive trapping of objects to all adjoining objects in the background foreground The background is everything under the object flat paint images other objects the foreground is everything on top of it You can use it to trap a single object or several similar objects e g letters of a text block e The Instant Trapper palette contains trapping parameters See Setting Instant Trapper Parameters on page 231 10 5 setting Instant Irapper Parameters 1 Double click the Trap to Objects or the Trap to All tool to open the Instant Trapper palette Instant Trapper x Trap Distance Hpx Truncate comers E Trap to white objects Note For more information on the Trap to Objects and the Trap to All tools see Using the Trap to Objects Tool on page 233 and Using the Trap to All Tool on page 236 2 Set the Trap Distance The unit used for the Trap Distance is the General unit defined in Illustrator s Unit and Display Performance Preferences Choose how to Truncate your traps endings On center P as in the left picture below or On mal edge un as in the right picture below 231 10 c S KO X DeskPack Advanced 4 r Choose how you want the Corners of your traps to be Rou
125. cuments In the case of placed images Channel Mapping doesn t alter the original linked image but the embedded version in your document making the changes non destructive Channel Mapping also remembers the original image s name after you edited it Channel Mapping can remap the inks of all commonly used images formats TIFF JPEG PSD Photoshop DCS Photoshop EPS PNG GIF and remap several images that have the same characteristics at once Channel Mapping also allows you to set your images to overprint other objects in your document or to use ink tints in your images 5 3 Getting Started 1 Place a CMYK image in your Illustrator Document 93 s DeskPack Advanced 2 Go to Window gt Esko gt Channel Mapping This opens the Channel Mapping palette It shows the inks used in your image in the Inks column and allows you to map them to other inks using the Map to column Channel Mapping X um i Name n E Overprint ins Mapto es Tnt O aia Process Cyan m Process Cyan 100 Process Magenta gt Process Magenta 100 Process Yellow Process Yellow 100 Process Black Process Black 100 Apply n Revert 3 To remap an ink click on its name in the Map to column and select another ink in the drop down list Channel Mapping X l x Name U E Overprint ma Mat O Tm a Process Cyan C gt Process Cyan
126. curacy resolution of 1 255 percent This corresponds to the 8 bits per pixel accuracy typically used by a Rip for outputting unscreened separations In other words what is measured will correspond exactly to the digital output of the Rip e Rounded Ink densities will be measured and presented with an accuracy of 1 Densities with a non integral e g 33 2 value will be rounded to the nearest integral value e g 33 lf Densitometer Mode is set to Rounded the values shown in the Ink Coverage palette will also be rounded Press Settings Folder allows to define the folder from which the Press Settings should be loaded If no folder is set up Viewer will try to use the default location DeskPack Container Settings Press lfthere is no DeskPack Container mounted or available then it will automatically switch to Users Shared EskoArtwork Settings Press onMacOS orC Users Public Documents EskoArtwork Settings Press on Windows The Viewer installer will automatically create these folders If no Press Settings Folder is available e g the defined or default folder has been removed you will not be able to change or create Press Settings 14 6 Viewer Compare loo 2960 You can use the Viewer Compare tool to compare the active document with another document To compare the active job 1 Go to Window gt Esko gt Viewer gt Compare The Compare dialog opens and the name for the Current Document is shown 14 LD
127. cursor that draws an arrow into the other object across the boundary between the two objects and click 234 DeskPack Advanced To change the trapping direction from spread to choke hold Option while dragging the cursor s arrow Note To cancel a trap while you are dragging the arrow use Escape or Command dot To cancel a trap after dragging the arrow use Command Z or Ctrl Z on PC Attention The two objects you want to trap must have a common edge When trying to trap two objects that appear to be touching but don t actually have a common edge you will get a warning message ee 4 Message Center x mw V No common edge could be found for trapping Instant Trapper 16 33 52 Show All This is the case for example when there is a small gap or a third object like a stroke in between the two objects Trapping an Object to Several Other Objects e To spread an object to several other objects a click into the object to spread b click the background and hold the mouse down to drag a rectangle around the other objects mj uj mj 235 1 0 S KO C DeskPack Advanced Note This traps all objects in the rectangle you drag in the same direction in the example above the purple star and the orange circle are both choked by the green rectangle If you need to trap different objects in different directions you should use combined trapping see Trapping using Combined Tra
128. d correct incorrect data You can choose an Error correction level from O to 8 The higher the correction level the more check sums are added to the barcode and the more incorrect data can be corrected Keep in mind that a higher correction level makes the barcode bigger and may limit the maximum length of the encoded data Note Level O means that there is only one check sum added to the data so incorrect data can be detected but not corrected You can choose Automatic to let the plug in pick the best error correction level for the data encoded MicroPDFA41 About this Barcode MicroPDF417 is a 2D multi row barcode derived from PDF417 for use on smaller areas It can encode up to 150 bytes Parameters General Parameters e Rotation on page 170 e Code on page 170 Additional Parameters e Bar Width Reduction on page 174 e Device Compensation on page 174 e Height on page 175 e Narrow Bar on page 177 e Snap Bars to Output Resolution on page 178 e Box on page 181 Specific Parameters Columns You can give your barcode between 1 and 4 Columns Rows You can give your barcode between 4 and 44 Rows Allow Text Compaction Choose this to let Dynamic Barcodes switch to Text compaction mode automatically when your barcode contains text data 161 ESKO NEM 162 This encodes the text data in your barcode more efficiently it makes that part of your barcode smaller Allow Numeric Compaction Choose this to
129. d high resolution images have identical separations Share Details Server Name Server I Local Share ILowRes Server Share HiRes i ee To add the Server Mapping do the following 1 In the OPI And Server Mapping dialog click the plus sign button to the lower left of the Servers pane This opens the Share Details dialog Share Details Server Name B Local Share FA Server Share i AEEEEEEM 1f 3 ESKO NEM 2 Enter or choose the name of the file server containing your linked images in Server Name 3 Enter or choose the name of the file server s share containing your linked images as it appears on your local machine in Local Share 4 Enter the name of the file server s share containing your linked images as it appears on the other machine that will use your Normalized PDF in Server Share OPI And Server Mapping Server Name Local Share Server Hi Res Images Shared_lImages Servers 5 f you want to add another Server Mapping to use your Normalized PDF on yet another machine repeat steps 1 to 4 To edit a Server Mapping double click it To remove a Server Mapping select it and click the minus button to the lower left of the Servers pane OPI Mapping The lower half of the OPI And Server Mapping dialog configures OPI Mapping which defines the rules for image substitution when exporting a Normalized PDF in a more specific way than Server Mapping OPI stands for Open Pres
130. d or Use Bounding Box of Structure you can specify a positive or negative offset The resulting varnish plate will be enlarged or shrunk with the specified offset in relation to the artboard or the bounding box This tool outputs a contour filled with a light yellow spot color This contour will be put in a new layer named Varnish This layer will be inserted directly under the structural design layers Note Create Varnish Plate will automatically exclude the coating free zones in the structural design file if any 3 3 38 LDeskPack Advanced Expand Structural Design Layer Choose Window gt Esko gt Structural Design gt Expand Structural Design Layer Expand Structural Design Layer Expand Structural Design Layer Main Design HH Into a New Layer Layer P Ivi Keep Line Types Select the structural design layer that you want to expand into a new Illustrator layer All art on the structural design layer will be copied to the new Illustrator layer The art on the new layer is no longer tagged as structural design objects The resulting objects are in CMYK and no longer in the technical structural design inks If you would like to keep the technical structural design inks toggle on Keep Line Types One common use where you would use this tool is when you are interested in creating a clipping path from the bleed outline of the structural design file otructural Design Preferences
131. derprint X031 Swatch Libraries P Preflight for Illustrator adds a new sub menu to Window menu containing the following entries Thin Parts allows to search for areas where objects are thinner than a given minimum width Collect Files opens a preferences dialog box which lets you collect all external files of the current job and write them to a separate directory External files include images fonts and ICC profiles 200 12 S K Q X DeskPack Advanced Preflight Parameters shows the palette for editing parameters that will be used when checking Validator shows the check palette which is used for checking and selecting objects that do not match the specified values The Font List tool is used to manage the classification of used fonts Depending on the installation sequence the order of appearance of the above items can change In this guide they will be explained according to what we think is a preferred workflow Note The first time that Show Check or Show Edit Parameters is activated either of the windows will open together with the other in one window Corresponding with the standard Illustrator windows this window is subdivided in tabs The selected menu item will be shown as the tab in front As with the other Illustrator window tabs these tabs can be dragged outside the window to create a new window with only this tab 12 4 Ihe Preflight for Illustrator Parameter Taosheet 256 This tabsheet contains all p
132. documents There are several ways to add inks e Drag and drop a color from the Swatches palette onto the Ink Mix Palette e Select Add Inks of Selected Color Swatch from the fly out menu to add the inks used in the selected Color Swatch e Select one of the Add inks options from the fly out menu to add Process Inks Hexachrome Inks Opaltone Inks or Process Inks Orange and Green When removing or converting inks in your document the Ink Mix will only be updated after selecting Remove Unused Inks from the Fly out menu Adding an Ink Mix to Graphic Styles You can add the current Ink Mix to the Graphic Styles by clicing the Add to Graphic Styles button or by selecting Add to Graphic Styles from the Fly out menu Handling ink mixes from previous versions Ink Mixes made in earlier versions of boostX use special BG inks These ink mixes can still be read but are no longer created Using Upgrade to Appearances will upgrade BG inks used in the selected objects to appearances Hestrictions Please keep in mind that Ink Mix is not available in these situations e ifthe selection contains multiple objects with different colors fill or stroke e if the selection contains multiple objects with a different stroke width e ifany effectis applied on a single fill or stroke in the Appearance palette An effect on the complete object is ok e ifastroke with Arrowhead or Profile is selected Uniform is ok DeskPack Advanced e if
133. e 173 Additional Parameters e Bar Width Reduction on page 174 e Device Compensation on page 174 e Narrow Bar on page 177 e Snap Bars to Output Resolution on page 178 GS1 DataBar Expanded Stacked About this Barcode GS1 DataBar Expanded Stacked can encode the same amount of data as GS1 DataBar Expanded but can also stack the barcode into several rows to save space DeskPack Advanced mp Keres aT T ET La ag I F 240 O000D00D00000000000N Parameters General Parameters e Rotation on page 170 e Code on page 170 e Composite Component on page 171 Text Parameters e Add Human Readable Characters on page 171 e Puton Top on page 172 e Multiple Text Lines on page 172 e Font Family Style and Size on page 172 e Alignment on page 173 e Vertical Offset on page 173 Additional Parameters e Max Row Width on page 173 e Bar Width Reduction on page 174 e Device Compensation on page 174 e Narrow Bar on page 177 e Snap Bars to Output Resolution on page 178 GS1 DataBar Limited About this Barcode GS1 Databar Limited is smaller than the GS1 DataBar barcode and can only encode Global Trade Item Numbers whose data part starts with 1 147 ESKO NEM oog000000000 TURN o og Parameters General Parameters e Rotation on page 170 e Code on page 170 e Composite Component on page 171 Text Parameters e Add Human Readable Characters on page 171 e Puton Top on page 172 e
134. e Chemical Pack Gravure Mecanical Packaging v1 draft6 ppp Sheetfed Offset Commer Password Cancel Open Parameter Set allows you to open a previously saved parameter set There is no need to browse Preflight for Illustrator stores its parameter sets in a dedicated directory If a set is password protected the password must be entered in order to load the set Save Parameter Setwill save the current parameter set in a predefined Preflight for Illustrator directory on the BackStage Server or on a DeskPack Container Enter an appropriate name for the set according to company workflow standards If applicable enter a password in the password field It then will be requested when loading the set 12 LDeskPack Advanced Parameters Save Corrugated Postprint Lot Flexo Flexible packaging Flexo Folding Cartons Flexo Labels Gravure Chemical Pack Gravure Mecanical Packaging v1 draft6 ppp Sheetfed Offset Commen Chaatfad Mfcat E Cartan Save as New Parameters v Password Protect Cancel EOK G Save Parameter Set as allows you to save the current parameter set with a different name New Parameter Set creates a new parameter set with the default values Import Parameter File allows you to browse to a user defined folder or location imports a previously exported parameter set and addes it to the used parameter set list Expor Parameter File allows you to browse to a user defined folder
135. e Let s have an example that the gradient already contains the target spot ink on one of its stops and another stop contains the process color being transformed The re mapping one of the process inks will add a new fill with the same gradient but with the target spot inks on the place of the process ink In other cases the overprint will blend these two fills and produce expected visual appearance In this particular case Illustrator will not blend these fills because both contain the same spot ink and Illustrator then ignores the overprint An operator is informed about that e Similar issue comes when the object already contains two gradient fills An operator is again warned 3 5 The Structural Design Plug in 3 5 1 Introduction 28 Introducing Structural Design Structural Design enables the Adobe Illustrator users to read in an ArtiosCAD ARD file an Esko flexible bag file and or a Collada dae or zae file This structural design can then be aligned to the graphics and this alignment will be maintained in the rest of the Esko workflow e g ArtiosCAD Visualizer PackEdge ArtPro Plato RIPs On top of that you can create a varnish plate from the bleed outline from the Illustrator artboard or from the bounding box of the structure automatically excluding the coating free areas Structural Design Export allows an Adobe Illustrator user to export contours from Illustrator to native ArtiosCAD ard format It also allows adding and modifyi
136. e Underprint layer and a choke an inward offset when subtracting from the White Underprint layer If the White Underprint should be slightly smaller you should do it the other way around 15 4 White Underprint settings 306 To set up White Underprint Ts 2 Select Window gt Esko gt White Underprint to open White Underprint dialog box Define the Offset the distance between the edge of the White Underprint layer and the edge of the object under which White Underprint is applied By default the offset is set to Spread outward Offset You can also choose to Choke inward offset Set the Miter Limit as you would for trapping Miter limit determines whether sharp corners in objects appear pointed or beveled You can also select Bevel and Round options Note The Miter Limit option is only available when using mitered corners Define if White Underprint should be generated only on visible parts of selected objects by setting the Only Visible Parts option In the Gradients section set how to handle Gradients e None By default objects with a gradient fill will be backed using a 100 solid white DeskPack Advanced e Choke by distance a gradient will be added to the White Underprint layer The gradient will be choked over the entered distance and run from the minimum 96 to 10096 e Bump minimum o a gradient will be added to the White Underprint layer The gradient will follow the same density as the original o
137. e on your system 2 Blue the font is NOT classified yet but detected as active on your system 3 Yellow The font has been classified before but is now unavailable on your system 4 Purple The font has not been classified yet and is currently unavailable on your system The latter case will happen only rarely but it may occur in a situation in which a font scan is done on one system without assigning some fonts then exporting the font list to another site where the font is currently not unavailable 12 9 3 Font List Options menu Clicking the black triangle in the top right corner of the Font List tab sheet reveals additional options Accept All Fonts will change the state of every unclassified font entry to classified Parameter Fonts x Accept All Fonts Times Mew Roman Italic B el Import Font File Times New Roman MT 5td s el Export Font File Times New Roman MT Std Bold s EJ BE Times New Roman MT Std Bold Condensed 5 E em Revert Font List Times Mew Roman MT Std Bold Italic 5 E BE Save Font List Times New Roman MT Std Condensed s He Q scan for Changed Fonts Times New Roman MT Std Condensed Italic seOl Times New Roman MT Std Italic sPJs v Import Font File Allows you to import a font classification database generated on another system Selecting this option invokes a standard file browser After selecting the font database file an import control dialog opens ala 12 DeskPack Advanc
138. e particularly useful for explaining non experienced users why certain parameters require specific values It helps you to understand the printing process and therefore to avoid more mistakes 12 4 1 Color This tab allows you to define parameters regarding color and ink usage in a job Following parameters can be set e Maximum Number of Allowed Process Inks determines how many process inks can be used in the job e Maximum Number of Allowed Spot Colors determines how many spot colors can be used e Maximum Number of Allowed Inks determines how many inks can be used altogether e Always Include in Ink Count determines the process colors that must be counted as a used ink even when not used in the job see remark e Warn on RGB Inks Usage Preflight for Illustrator will report all objects that use an RGB color specification Only RGB colors defined in Illustrator are considered if e g an RGB image is imported Illustrator does not generate extra colors e Treat Registration Color as Process Color When activated the color registration is regarded as CMYK components thus counted as 4 inks even if no or less than 4 process inks are in the job This is useful in a composite workflow where often registration marks are converted to CMYK by default Note Always Include in Ink Count This feature can be important if changing an ink in a printing tower is not allowed Some printers always keep all process colors on their press becau
139. e toolbar e the Inspection Setup palette which can be opened by selecting the Inspection Setup tool or by adding an Inspection point 3 DDeskPack Advanced x Inspection Setup Inspection Points Default dE 2 CIELAB Delta E Classic af a 151 724 mm 97 225 mm 2 62 0 76 766 mm 183 448 mm OF 1 0 66 113 mm 185 86 mm 7 nspection Boxes Default Profile Warning Warning Warning Dynamic Art Boxes Default Profile Warning 3 7 1 Adding and changing Inspection points The Inspection Setup palette shows all the Inspection points indicating the coordinates distance from the top left corner of the trim box Lab value and default deltaE value Select the Inspection Setup tool from the Illustrator toolbar and click in the job to insert a new Inspection point The Inspection point will be visible in the job with its number next to it e Select an Inspection point in the palette to highlight the corresponding Inspection point on the Illustrator job You can select multiple Inspection points Select one or more Inspection points and click the delete button points e You can manually change the Lab and deltaE value for every Inspection Point to delete the Inspection PH Click the Refresh button to update the Inspection Point list 61 ESKO NEM You can move an Inspection point in two ways e Click within the Inspection point and drag it to the new location e nthe Inspection Po
140. ed Import Control When importing this Font Attribute file what do you want to do Completely Replace Font Database Accept New Attributes on Conflicts _ Maintain Original Attributes on Conflicts f Ask on Each Conflict Cancel It prompts the action Preflight for Illustrator should perform if the imported list contains other classification parameters for the same fonts than those in the current font List The options are e Completely Replace Font Database this option specifies that all entries in the current Font List will be removed and the parameters from the imported file will be kept e Accept New Attributes on Conflicts the imported entries are merged with the current Font List and if there are conflicts the settings from the import are assigned e Maintain Original Attributes on Conflicts the imported font classification entries are merged with the current font list and if there are conflicts the settings from the original font list are assigned e Ask on Each Conflict the imported entries are merged with the current font list and in case of conflicts the user will be prompted to assign the desired classification If the last option is selected a dialog appears when a conflict occurs For every conflicting classification the name of the font is displayed followed by the original local classification and then the new imported classification Following options can be selected e Keep
141. ed Art you get a separate dialog in which you can either type the name of the Named Art you want to use or select it from the dropdown at the right Once Named Art has been used it remains available in the Attach To dropdown Named Art is only possible on objects not on groups Named Art can t be hidden or locked Note Standard Marks will be automatically attached to a currently selected PowerLayout otandalone grid or another selected Dynamic Mark If no grid or Dynamic Mark is selected the Standard Mark is attached to the Trim Box A PowerLayout Standalone grid is a Step and Repeat of a single file or object s generated by the PowerLayout Standalone plug in If such a grid is available in the document you can select its name in the dropdown For more information see the PowerLayout Standalone documentation Positioning The way the Mark is attached can be chosen by clicking and dragging the blue square representing the Mark to the desired position on the grey square representing the Attach To reference Each square has 9 reference points top left center and right middle left center and right and bottom left center and right so you have 81 different ways of positioning the mark This setting is not available for Bearer Bars and for Cut Marks In the example underneath the top center of the bounding box of the mark will be placed on the left bottom corner of the bounding box of the reference defined in the Attach to fi
142. ed in PackEdge or ArtPro but it is not possible to open such Normalized PDF using this plugin because Adobe Illustrator does not support this variant of PSD A workaround is to embed the PSD in PackEdge or ArtPro first The following error is shown by Adobe Illustrator in such cases 249 ll ESKOS LDeskPack Advanced Unsupported color mode or depth Only RGB CMYK Grayscale and Bitmap are supported The Image Extractor plug in is used for linked Esko CT LP files This is a free non licensed functionality of Image Extractor Linked files with remapped inks are imported as Channel Mapped images The visual representation will be correct however a valid license for the Channel Mapping plug in is needed to edit the channel mapping Adobe Illustrator has performance problems when a single document contains many linked rasters or few linked files are referenced many times It may sometimes cause that only Outline preview can be used The PDF Import plug in improves the handling of such documents Note This optimization works also for non Normalized PDF files including native Adobe lllustrator documents but only as long as the PDF Import is installed Missing images It sometimes happens that the referenced file is not found Then the following dialog pops up Missing External Image Document contains a linked external image but the image cannot be found File Esko jpg Select an option Leave Unresolved Use
143. ee no trapping was applied so white lines appear at the registration shifts 14 4 7 Breakout 294 A Breakout is an area where the percentage of a single separation is lower than the First Visible Dot value This can be used to track areas that won t show up on print because the values are too low Your printer should provide you with the First visible Dot value The First visible dot is set in the Press oettings see Define Press Settings on page 282When switching to Breakout mode the preview will be dimmed and all areas where a single separation has a value lower than the First Visible Dot value but higher than 096 will be displayed in highlight color You can measure the actual percentages in that specific area using the densitometer see Measure Ink Densities on page 288 DeskPack Advanced Note Technical Inks are not taken into account See also Technical inks in Viewer on page 295 14 4 8 Moire Detection Moire Detection allows to detect possible screening problems Moire in the file You can set the options to highlight overlapping areas to detect situations in which Moire might occur e when the two overlapping areas have screening angles that do not differ 30 degrees e when the two overlapping areas have the same angle e when the two overlapping areas have different rulings e when the two overlapping areas have different dot shapes You can use the Ignore inks option to ignore inks that have e adensity lower t
144. ein are the property of Esko Software BVBA The material information and instructions are provided on an AS IS basis without warranty of any kind There are no warranties granted or extended by this document Furthermore Esko Software BVBA does not warrant guarantee or make any representations regarding the use or the results of the use of the software or the information contained herein Esko Software BVBA shall not be liable for any direct indirect consequential or incidental damages arising out of the use or inability to use the software or the information contained herein The information contained herein is subject to change without notice Revisions may be issued from time to time to advise of such changes and or additions No part of this document may be reproduced stored in a data base or retrieval system or published in any form or in any way electronically mechanically by print photoprint microfilm or any other means without prior written permission from Esko Software BVBA This document supersedes all previous dated versions PANTONE PantoneLIVE and other Pantone trademarks are the property of Pantone LLC All other trademarks or registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners Pantone is a wholly owned subsidiary of X Rite Incorporated 9 Pantone LLC 2015 All rights reserved This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group Portions of this software are copyright 9 1996 200
145. eld ial Note If you create a Mark from an existing object the Positioning settings the blue rectangle will be automatically set using the smallest offset possible while keeping the object at the same location 191 ES E S KO x DeskPack Advanced 192 Offset In the offset fields you can move the mark based on the defined position The direction of the offset up down left or right depends on the positioning and is shown by the Attach Attach To Trim Box B 0 mm H 0 mm t fo mm H u fo mm To Trim Box E arrows Note You can also manually move Marks In that case the offset will automatically adjust to the new location The other settings Attach To and Positioning will NOT change Repeat For custom marks you can use the Repeat buttons to choose if the mark should be repeated or not From left to right e No repeat e Repeat on all 4 sides The positions of the marks are rotated 90 around the center of the Attach e Repeated horizontally The positions of the marks are mirrored over the vertical center line uo e Repeated vertically The positions of the marks are mirrored over the horizontal center line uo DeskPack Advanced ES Note For vertical and horizontal repeat the position of the marks is mirrored but the actual marks are rotated 180 degrees 8 4 2 Color The color of a mark can be one of these settings Registration The mark will be colored with 10096
146. eme Parameters DATAMatrix General Parameters e Rotation on page 170 e Code on page 170 Additional Parameters e Bar Width Reduction on page 174 e Device Compensation on page 174 e Symbol Type on page 179 e Cell Size on page 179 e Width Total Height on page 180 e Box on page 181 EAN 8 About this Barcode EAN 8 is an abbreviated version of EAN 13 for use on smaller packages It contains eight digits of data lt D000 DOOU gt Parameters General Parameters 139 ESKOcC 140 e Rotation on page 170 e Code on page 170 Text Parameters e Add Human Readable Characters on page 171 e Light Margin Indicator on page 172 e Font Family Style and Size on page 172 e Vertical Offset on page 173 Additional Parameters e Bar Width Reduction on page 174 e Device Compensation on page 174 e Magnification on page 174 e Height on page 175 e Snap Bars to Output Resolution on page 178 e Box on page 181 EAN 19 About this Barcode LDeskPack Advanced European Article Numbering system or EAN is the standard for article numbering in Europe It is also used in Japan where it is called JAN Note EAN is the European equivalent of the UPC system in the U S A and Canada Both systems use the same size requirements and a similar encoding scheme This means that most European and American retail barcode scanners can read both EAN and UPC barcodes For more information on UPC see UPC A on page 1
147. en 125 7 f Barcode Types and Parameters sss seen 127 7 7 1 Supported Barcode Types sese mener nnne nnn 127 LANE TC OS ecc ERE 133 1 1 3 Barcode Paratmielel Suae tend nli rette imperio tur iet Rari erp limitare emma rie 170 7 8 Barcode Parameters from the Job Folder sss mene nemen 182 7 0 1 Connect ng to a JOD FOIE aispa ERE an pneu ar uuo EERE 183 7 8 2 Connect Dynamic Barcodes to Job Setup sss nennen 183 7 8 3 Use Barcode parameters from Job Setup ccc eee nennen 184 7 8 4 Updating barcode parameters from Job Setup emnes 185 8 Peiper 186 8 1 Copyrigt NOtCE M T E 186 o RCE ciae NETT Oo o E A T EN 187 8 2 1 reaug e USE TVISER SS aa na teat aetatem adi tot hte qe Dot Ouen ame ao 187 8 3 The Dynamic MarKS Dalelle ss named ense naked po tuvev ktkt ttrt vera toni A P aU rv CR EHE aS eub a ep ind 188 8 3 1 Adding a Standard Mark sse inania 189 8 3 2 Adding objects as IMIalfKsnsacsesxiaz meti edic ba pIKtM NEP FIR d caP rU UP OM ESL iS Und KRUG AMA EEEE EEE 190 8 4 Dynamic Mark Propertles ces resort ere mte eie nacer i E FH nC CF P iE 190 BAT POSION essaie tam equdtepiup m MED M atem MM MEM OA EDEN ME 190 o4 S N D o NCR an nnn O eT ee ee ee eee eee 193 8 4 39 Specific Mark PROMS TSS accuair tnt ttt suki to Sis apelin atiitdaaaeces 194 og UI SS NR m 213 ST ofc Ml Wc die Sennett et ee eet eee ER E ee ee ee eee eee 214 B2 ONE MAR SU essays case ee densa trm tm esate E IM UN aera a
148. er On the Mac this file is normally in Users username Library Preferences Adobe illustrator CSx Settings Copy the file to the same location on the target machines There are a few restrictions when using OPI Mapping e The high resolution images must be accessible from the client workstation e Ink Manager will not show extra inks that are present in the high resolution images e When exporting the file using Shuttle only the inks from Ink Manager are shown not any extra ones present in the high resolution images e PDF Export Viewer for Illustrator and PowerTrapper Client and Standalone will use the high resolution images and will know about any extra inks Trim Box and Other Settings Trim Box In the Trim Box Borders group of the PDF Export Preferences dialog the Trim Box Borders drop down list lets you choose how the edge of the exported PDF file is chosen using the Trim Box from Document using the Current Artboard or by using the Artwork Bounding Box Fit Media Box to Artwork expands or shrinks the Media Box as appropriate Other Outline All Text converts all text to outlines Export Hidden Objects and Layers includes hidden objects when the PDF file is exported If Expand Patterns is selected patterns will be replaced by actual objects The path containing the pattern fill will then be filled with the objects as defined in the pattern Contourize Bitmaps will convert 1 bit images linked or embedded into vect
149. er the list of Printing Methods is loaded from the Automation Engine server Note This implies that Printing Methods saved in earlier versions of Deskpack are no longer visible and will need to be redefined Printing Methods can be saved in the Automation Engine Configure tool or in the Ink Options by selecting Save to presets Ink Options Ink Name PANTONE Bright Green C oK Ink Group Spot Ink Cancel Ink Book EJ PANTONE Solid Coated SS DESEE Ink Type Normal s Ruling 120 LPI Angle 45 Dotshape None P Printing Method Unknown y _ Save printing method to presets If there s no connection to an Automation Engine the presets are saved locally in the Adobe lllustrator Preferences 3 4 5 Job Setup 26 You can check the Job Setup for every ink indicating if the ink settings correspond with the ink specifications in the Job Folder By default the Job Setup column is hidden By selecting Show Job Setup in the fly out menu you can make it visible The status of the Job Setup column can be e Grey no information from the Job Setup is available e g the document is not saved in a Job Folder e Green the ink in the document has the same parameters as defined in the Job Folder e Yellow the ink in the document is not specified in the Job Folder DeskPack Advanced e Red the ink in the document is specified in the Job Folder but uses different parameters The affected parameter will be
150. ers Pantone is a wholly owned subsidiary of X Rite Incorporated 9 Pantone LLC 2015 All rights reserved This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group Portions of this software are copyright 9 1996 2002 The FreeType Project www freetype org All rights reserved Portions of this software are copyright 2006 Feeling Software copyright 2005 2006 Autodesk Media Entertainment Portions of this software are copyright 91998 2003 Daniel Veillard All rights reserved Portions of this software are copyright 91999 2006 The Botan Project All rights reserved Part of the software embedded in this product is gSOAP software Portions created by gSOAP are Copyright 92001 2004 Robert A van Engelen Genivia inc All rights reserved Portions of this software are copyright 91998 2008 The OpenSSL Project and 1995 1998 Eric Young eayQcryptsoft com All rights reserved This product includes software developed by the Apache Software Foundation http www apache org Adobe the Adobe logo Acrobat the Acrobat logo Adobe Creative Suite Illustrator InDesign PDF Photoshop PostScript XMP and the Powered by XMP logo are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and or other countries Microsoft and the Microsoft logo are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries SolidWorks is a registered trademark of SolidWorks C
151. es takes half of the group of black and white bars to measure one character 176 DeskPack Advanced Ratio The Ratio is the factor between the width of the narrow bar and the width of the wide bar in your barcode For example enter 3 if you want your wide bar to be three times as wide as your narrow bar Narrow Bar This parameter determines the width of the narrowest bar of your barcode and affects the width of your barcode proportionally For GS1 barcodes this affects the size height and width of your barcode proportionally Wide Bar This parameter determines the width of the widest bar of your barcode Gap Enter the width of the white space between the bars Note The Ratio influences the Gap size increasing the Ratio also increases the Gap size Vertical alignment Dynamic Barcodes allows you to resize either the UPC A or the GS1 Databar Expanded Stacked coupon barcode so they are aligned vertically with each other You can choose e None to keep the original size of both the UPC and the GS1 barcodes VLE ESKO NEM 1 8 nacnac 2 e Resize UPC to GS1 to resize the UPC barcode so it has the same height as the GS1 barcode TUM BUE O00 99276 e Resize GS1 to UPC to resize the GS1 barcode so it has the same height as the UPC barcode m l nopnog oonnon m uu snap Bars to Output Resolution s MIDOODO 99276 g 3 8 Use this to adjust the barcode
152. eshes the ink list Process Inks In Images The plug in uses Illustrator to determine which inks are used in external images Illustrator has some limitations e With linked EPS images it is not possible to detect whether CMYK was used in the linked image Ink Manager will assume that CMYK is present in the linked EPS images unless the user has specified otherwise e TIFF images with spot channels always have CMYK channels even if those channels are empty So with externally linked images the plug in doesn t really know whether CMYK is used Process Inks in Images offers a manual solution If you click this option the Process Inks in Images dialog box appears DeskPack Advanced Process Inks in Images Process Cyan IV Process Magenta IV Process Yellow IV Process Black Cancel By default all toggles are switched on which means that the plug in will assume that external images contain cyan magenta yellow and black If you know that there is no cyan in the externally placed images you can switch Process Cyan off Click Apply and at the bottom of the Ink Manager the indication Disabled in Images C will appear The plug in will assume that only magenta yellow and black were used in the externally placed images If cyan is used in other objects of the document it will be listed in ink manager e Show Hide Screen Details When you hide the details on
153. eskPack Advanced Compare Documents to Compare Current Document file2 ai a po Cancel Compare To file Lai B Browse Compare What Entire Document 2 Select the file you want to compare the active document to e f you want to compare it to an open document select its file name from the dropdown list e f you want to compare it to a document on disk click the browse button and select the file 3 Define what to compare e all artwork e the current Artboard e only Trim Box or Media Box if they are defined e only the selected area 4 Click OK A Miewer Compare window will open showing a comparison between the two jobs Note If you have a Trim Box defined in the Illustrator job the Viewer Compare tool will only show what s inside the trim box 14 6 1 The Viewer Compare window The Viewer Compare window shows the two jobs and their differences and contains a number of tools and buttons to inspect these differences in various ways Move over a button with the cursor and the tooltip will indicate what it stands for Buttons with a triangle in the lower right corner contain additional options Control click Windows or Command click Mac the button or click and hold the button to see the extra options 297 14 DeskPack Advanced PowerTrapper_bolognaise_job 0 ay 7 PowerTrapper bolognaise job 2 0 Alignment ri offset x v 0 0 o o mm Difference Threshold 0 0 x Ay ff ld s
154. eters e Rotation on page 170 e Code on page 170 Text Parameters e Add Human Readable Characters on page 171 e Font Family Style and Size on page 172 e Alignment on page 173 e Vertical Offset on page 173 Additional Parameters e Bar Width Reduction on page 174 e Device Compensation on page 174 e Size on page 175 e Height on page 175 e Characters per unit on page 175 e Ratio on page 177 e Narrow Bar on page 177 e Snap Bars to Output Resolution on page 178 e Box on page 181 163 ESKO NEM 164 QR About this Barcode The QR barcode is a 2 dimensional barcode used for commercial tracking and convenience oriented applications aimed at mobile phone users known as mobile tagging QR codes storing addresses and URLs may appear in magazines on signs buses business cards or other objects Users with a camera phone equipped with the correct reader application can scan the QR code to display text contact information connect to a wireless network or open a web page in the phone s browser e n Position pattern required LJ Alignment pattern required Timing pattern required Ej Version information o E Format information Data and error correction keys Parameters General Parameters e Rotation on page 170 DeskPack Advanced e Code on page 170 Additional Parameters e Bar Width Reduction on page 174 e Device Compensation on page 174 e Cell Size on page 179 e Width Total Height on page 18
155. ext purchase or on variable weight items Max How Width Use this parameter to define how many segments of data groups of bars encoding several digits can fit in one row If the barcode contains more segments they will be stacked In the example below the first barcode has a Max Row Width of 8 segments When reducing this to 4 segments the segments that don t fit in the row width anymore are stacked forming a second row second barcode 01 1234586785 21234567890 uu I Wo am ti012123456789 01231 The GS1 Max Row Width parameter applies to the GS1 Databar Expanded Stacked component of the GS1 U S Coupon Interim barcode 173 ESKO NEM 174 Text Format Choose a text format for the human readable characters of your barcode For NDC HRI barcodes you can chhose a variant of the U S National Drug Code For ITF 14 ITF 16 and UPC SCS barcodes you can choose a variant of the Shipping Container Symbol Bar Width Reduction Use this to adjust the width of barcode bars in order to compensate for ink bleeding when printing on your substrate Your printer or customer will usually provide you with the value to use For example if your printer tells you that the line width will increase by 0 01mm you should use a Bar Width Reduction value of 0 01 mm You can enter the Bar Width Reduction in microns milliinches mil millimeters or inches Tip You can enter a negative value if you want to pri
156. f Fonts is enabled the Serif parameter is applied Otherwise the standard settings are applied e For all other fonts the standard settings are applied E LLLL L EILI IIJ Preflight Parameters wf Enabled v Minimum fant size 12 pt 12 pt 12 pt 5 12 pt 12 pt 12 pt M B 12 nt 12 pt 12 pt v Minimum x height vi Check on TrueType Fonts MM vi Check on Bitmap Fonts Missing PS Outline mmm vi Warn on Multi Color Text i Build Font List Current Set Untitled 12 LDeskPack Advanced 44 PREFLIGHT FONT LIST Times New Roman s 8 Times Mew Roman Bold 5 BL VALIDATOR Using Parameter Set Untithad Current Parameter Rule Thin Single Color Lines Thin Multi Colar Ink Lines Small Text Objects Image Resolutions Image Types Multi Color Text Echec Stop at violating rule M L 0 i Select Next 1 Info ivi Show Parameter Values Times New Roman Bold 8 pt Select All Times New Roman Bold 10 pt NormalTextCheck Minimum Negative Size 4 23 mm Minimum One Color Size 4 23 mm and Minimum Multi Color Size 4 23 mm SerifTextC heck Minimum Negative Size 4 23 mm Minimum One Color Size 4 23 mm and Minimum Alti Onalar Gizo A 74 dh The font in this example Times New Roman has been defined as Bold in the Font List See the Preflight Fonts List part 3 lines of text are placed in the job at respective font sizes of 6
157. f available categories and fields d if applicable choose the Format to use for your chosen Field see Formatting Dynamic Fields on page 207 for details Insert Field Show Local Variables H4 Category Field Barcodes File Name Date amp Time Fonts Document Layer Names File Info XMP CMYK Profile Inks RGB Profile Links Color Mode System Trim Box DFE Media Box Crop Box 7 Format name ext j mm Q Repeat format for all items Separator Comma m Preview Untitled 1 Cancel _ Note The Preview line shows how the field will be resolved in the current document e when you are satisfied with how your field will look like click OK The dynamic parts of a text object will appear between square brackets White Underprint allows to add White Underprint to your Mark See White Underprint on page 212 Categories and Types Local Variables Barcodes e Number of Barcodes e Barcode Type e Barcode Code 203 IM ESKOS Date amp Time Document File Info XMP Inks Links System 204 DDeskPack Advanced Bar Width Reduction Barcode Magnification Barcode Device Compensation Barcode Narrow Bar Date Time Date and Time File Name Fonts Layer Names CMYK Profile HGB Profile Color Mode Trim Box Crop Box Bleed Box Media Box Art Box Description Author Document Title Author Title Number of Inks Number of Technical Inks Ink Names Technical Ink Names Short In
158. f the loaded ArtiosCAD file followed by _copy 10 Click Save If you have Studio Designer you will automatically see the ARD file with the new cutout folded in 3D STUDIO o4 3 LDeskPack Advanced 3 6 he Page Box Plug in 3 6 1 Introduction Page Boxes are used to define the outside borders and margins of your document and it is used in the Esko Software Suite workflow environment Page Box definitions are saved as part of the Illustrator file used by the plug ins Shuttle and PowerLayout Client Page Boxes are not taken into account when printing directly from Adobe Illustrator nor are they exported when exporting to a non native format via standard Adobe plug ins They do not appear as objects in the Layers palette You can find the Page Box plug in in Window Esko Trim Box and Media Box The Page Box plugin can work in two modes e Trim Box and Media Box defining only those two page boxes See Trim Box and Media Box on page 55 e All Page Boxes See A Page Boxes on page 58 You can switch mode by selecting Switch to mode from the flyout menu 3 6 2 Trim Box and Media Box 1 Trim Box and Media Box z Switch to All Page Boxes Trim Box Borders Fit Trim Box to Artboard wt custom Fit Trim Box to Artwork p Width 210 002 mm Orientation Fit Trim Box to Selection freon ove 3 Fit Trim Box to CAD 4 Fito Pal El Fit Media Box to Artboard nme oe Fit Media Box to Artw
159. format lt gt 88 um Test files Qsearh DEVICES a 3 AP Files FGHARED Ga barcodes j ll icc PLACES GE ink BMP bmp Deskt alee lull JPC Targa tga m COLHE i PH PNG png LJ TEMP Junk m Tif AutoCAD Drawing dwg Test files IE AutoCAD Interchange File dxf Normalized PDF pdf Enhanced Metafile emf Flash swt Use Adobe Dialog JPEG jpg i Macintosh PICT pct A A Photoshop psd New Folder HORN Cancel Export Forma TIFF tif Text Format txt Windows Metafile wmf 3 Click Export 13 ESKO NEM 4 In the PDF Export Preferences dialog that opens fill in the export preferences see PDF Export Preferences on page 14 5 Click OK to export the file PDF Export Preferences When exporting your files to the Normalized PDF format you need to set a few Preferences PDF Export Preferences Images And Linked Files C Embed Images 9 Save Links Add Preview max 72 DPI Q Copy Linked Files Next To Output File e Use Links And Apply Server Mapping Copy Links If Not On File Servers OPI And Server Mapping Settings Trim Box Borders Trim Box from Document Fit Media Box to Artwork Outline All Text Export Hidden Objects and Layers Expand Patterns Contourize Bitmaps wi Convert Blended Objects to Images Resolution High 600 dpi H4 E m oni i Cancel CoO You can also open the P
160. formation batch number expiration date If you want your barcode to have a Composite Component enter the alohanumeric data to encode in this field Note Dynamic Barcodes checks the data you enter for the Composite Component for example to see if the Application Identifiers you entered are correct and displays a warning if it is invalid Messages x C Invalid or missing Al at BR Dynamic Barcodes 14 48 39 e Invalid or missing AI at amp amp 95 Dynamic Barcodes 14 48 39 Show All Add Human Readable Characters This parameter adds human readable characters numeric or alphanumeric characters under your barcode It is enabled by default This is the same barcode with and without human readable characters 1 234567 890128 gt JL IBI TIL IU 171 f ESKO NEM Lo Put on Too This parameter allows you to put the Human Readable Characters above instead of below the barcode bars Multiole Text Lines Select this parameter if you want the human readable characters to be printed on multiple lines below the barcode Dynamic Barcodes will start a new line for every element of the barcode data starting with the Application Identifier amp 01515601254125453 400 21234 810021234 56 C01 3 1560125412345 810051235456 Note When opening your document in PackEdge the characters will be placed back on a single line 40021234 Light Margin I
161. h You can set the stroke to overprint using the Overprint option When selecting a single object with an Inner Outer Stroke the Inner Outer Stroke dialog will reflect the properties of the Inner Outer Stroke If multiple objects are selected the common settings are shown If the objects have different settings e g different Inner Outer Width or a different color the settings will be empty or in case of different colors show a question mark Ink Mix Inner Outer Stroke can work with InkMix Colors The Inner Outer Palette color patch will get a mixed color indicated by a m in the patch which is same as InkMix Palette Stroke color patch If you change the Inks value from the InkMix Palette the Inner Outer stroke will change automatically If the Inner Outer Stroke color patch is a mixed color double clicking the color patch will open the Ink Mix Palette since mixed inks can only be changed in InkMix For more information on Ink Mix see nk Mix on page 85 89 ESKO NEM In the example underneath the star has a Inner Width of 2pt and an Outer Width of 6pt 4 f Rotate Document 9O Using Rotate Document you can rotate the complete document the artboard page boxes and all objects All objects and page boxes keep their relative positions Choose Window gt Esko gt boostX gt Rotate Document to open the Rotate Document palette Select the Angle and Direction and click Apply The options are e 90 CW Cl
162. h for any object with a certain style Fill Type Select the objects with a certain Fill type You can choose between Solid Gradient or Pattern Opacity Select the objects that have a fill or a stroke with an opacity level or transparency lower than a certain percentage Blending Select objects that have a fill or a stroke set with one of the blending types for example darken or multiply Select a blending mode from the drop down list Overprint Select the objects set in overprint Opacity Mask Select any objects with an Opacity mask linked to it Opacity masks are used to alter the transparency of objects and can also be selected via the Opacity option Effects Select any object that has an Adobe lllustrator Effect applied to it 12 6 5 Color The Color group has several options SELECT BY ATTRIBLITES Object Type F nue Attributes gt Fill and Stroke gt Appearance x Color 7 Fill Contains Ink Process Black be C Fit Color ts N Any z 0x _ Stroke Color Is B m No Other Inks Present White Stroke Contains Ink Process Black H Any ox No Other Inks Present Deselect Refine Selec Collect _ 0 c ee EE Fill Color is Select an object based on the color used for its fill By clicking once the color patch will take the color of the object currently selected or when no selection is made it takes the Illustrator current style W
163. h type Open Closed or Compound Using Any option the selection is made between objects which are Open Closed or Compound Text Select all text or all text smaller than the point size you specify in the Text field Symbol Select all the objects that are Adobe Illustrator symbols Linked File Select objects or images which have been linked to and not embedded into the Adobe Illustrator file Image Selects all placed image files of the file type defined in the list The image has to be embedded in the file Mesh Select all objects that are Adobe Illustrator Mesh objects Dynamic Barcodes Select dynamic barcode objects generated by the Esko Dynamic Barcodes plug in Dynamic Table Select dynamic table objects generated by the Esko Dynamic Tables plug in Dynamic Object Select XML driven dynamic objects generated by the Esko Dynamic Content plug in Thin Part Fix Select objects created by using the Fix button in the Thin Parts function of the Preflight For Illustrator plugin General Attributes The General Attributes group has three options LDeskPack Advanced SELECT BY ATTRIBUTES gt Object Type General Attributes Smaller than H omm Similar as Selected Object Deselect Refine I Select j Collect 2 Le Ve VM Name Select an object by typing its name The name of an object can be found and modified in the Illustrator Layer palette Object names are by default placed between angled
164. han a certain value e adensity higher than a certain value e aluminance higher than a certain value as in all those cases the Moire patterning will hardly be visible All these Moire Detection options are stored in the Press Settings See Define Press Settings on page 282 Note Technical Inks are not taken into account See also Technical inks in Viewer on page 295 14 4 9 Technical inks in Viewer By default all technical inks are shown in Viewer and rendered as opaque inks You can disable Show Technical Inks in the fly out menu of the Viewer In that case technical inks will not be shown in the Viewer nor in the separation list However if a technical ink influences another separation e g if an object in a technical ink is knocking out the background this will still be visible Even when shown technical inks have no influence on the TAC limit Breakout or Moire Detection See Total Area Coverage on page 290 Breakout on page 294 and Moire Detection on page 295 Technical inks are also not included in the total ink value below the separation list when measuring a color See Measure Ink Densities on page 288 14 5 Viewer Preferences Open the Viewer Preferences dialog by choosing Preferences gt Esko gt Viewer Preferences to set one or more of the following options Image Display Quality Allows you to selected the preferred quality for displaying the contone images present in a document Following options can be selec
165. hange the drop down for Static color and Registration it is fixed at All while for Darkest it is fixed at Only Printing 8 4 3 Specific Mark Properties 194 otandard Marks have beside Position and Color some specific properties Also Text Marks have specific properties allowing to create dynamic Text Marks Cut Mark Properties Cut Marks are created from a symbol named CutMark and are by default 0 1mm wide and 10mm long DeskPack Advanced DYNAMIC MARKS PROPERTIES Position Attach to Trim Box H 0 mm E pe Color Darkest Cut Mark Offset fo mm Set Symbol Position Cut Marks will be automatically attached to a currently selected PowerLayout Standalone grid or another selected Dynamic Mark If no grid or Dynamic Mark is selected the Cut Mark is attached to the Trim Box Color Cut Marks are by default in Darkest color Offset allows to define the offset for the Cut Marks A positive offset will move the Cut Marks to the outside Symbol allows to change the symbol used for the Cut Mark See Changing the Symbol on page 201 Bearer Bars Properties Adding a Bearer Bars mark will create two bars one on each side left and right default or top and bottom The bars will automatically take the size vertical or horizontal of the Attach selection DYNAMIC MARKS PROPERTIES Position Attach to Corner Mark 1 H gt 0mm A e W Show on Bath Sides Colo
166. hen multiple different objects are selected and you click once the default color black is chosen Double clicking the patch will open the Illustrator Color Picker 268 12 LDeskPack Advanced StrokeColor is Select an object based on the color used for its stroke By clicking once the color patch will take the color of the object currently selected or when no selection is made it takes the Illustrator current style When multiple different objects are selected and you click once the default color black is chosen Double clicking the patch will open the Illustrator Color Picker Tip Change your current style for fill or stroke to None See Tools palette or Appearance and select all objects with no fill or no stroke Fill Contains Ink Select an object based on the ink used for its fill This can be a process color ink or a spot color ink e Use the Lower than and Higher than options to only select the objects with certain percentages of the ink e Select the No other inks present check box if you only want to select objects with a fill in the selected ink but without other additional inks Stroke Contains Ink Select an object based on the ink used for its stroke This can be a process color ink or a spot color ink e Use the Lower than and Higher than options to only select the objects with certain percentages of the ink e Select No other inks present check box if you only want to select objects with a stroke in the
167. hich makes a new inspection necessary e 5 A green dot indicates the job has been checked and no problems have been found e En An exclamation sign means that anomalities have been found Each rule can be in 4 states 1 Small Objects 2 9 Small Objects 3 A 4 Min Maxlnk Densities A AK 246 Min Max Ink Densities The rule has not been checked or the latest check is no longer valid The rule has been checked successfully he rule has been checked and 4 anomalities were found The rule has been checked 6 anomalities were found and the 2nd irregular object is currently selected in the Illustrator job AB NL After checking the dialog changes as follows If Stop at Violating Rule is enabled the rule indicators will turn green upto the one that reports an irregularity This one shows a yellow exclamation mark The following rule indicators will stay grey If Stop at Violating Rule is disabled all rule indicators will show green except for those with a problem which will be yellow In both cases the Select First button will be enabled after a check Clicking it will select the first violating object The button then changes to Select Next After every violating object has been selected the button is disabled again Activating the Select All button selects all violating instances for the currently selected rule Clicking Check again will recheck the design from the selected rule onwards Note If Al Units and Undo
168. hlight Color to change the colors in which differences are shown e Reset Difference Highlight Colors to reset the default colors e Channel Matching to match corresponding channels inks for the two documents e View Both side by side shows both versions next to each other You can choose between e Automatic tiling e Horizontal tiling e Vertical tiling e View both mirror reference shows the current document on top of the mirrored reference document 14 6 4 Alignment Comparing files with different sizes may seem like a challenge as they are not aligned in the Viewer Compare window but it provides some tools that make it very easy Alignment ri Offset X v 0 0 0 0 mm e Alignment e onone of 9 corner center points e Align From Ruler see Align from Ruler on page 300 e Auto Align From Ruler see Auto Align from Ruler on page 301 e Auto Align see Auto Align on page 302 e Auto Align see Auto Align on page 302 e Use trim box for alignment e Offset Horizontal and Vertical Align from Ruler The ruler tool works by defining two points one in each file that have to be aligned 300 DeskPack Advanced oelect the reference version of the file by clicking the icon 2 3 Indicate the ruler anchor point Select the Ruler tool owitch to the other version by clicking the icon or use Ctrl S The anchor point here in the red circle will be in a different location in the second file version 5 Indicate the po
169. holder 121 f DDeskPack Advanced Barcode Type EAN 13 a Rotation 0 JV o Code O000000000000 Additional parameters f 6 Dynamic Barcodes Advanced 7 6 1 Choosing a Font Standard You can choose between two font standards for the human readable characters of your barcodes 1 Goto Illustrator gt Preferences gt Esko gt Dynamic Barcodes Preferences to open the Dynamic Barcodes Preferences dialog Dynamic Barcodes Preferences Font For New Barcodes OCR B Standard OCR B Bitstream 2 Choose either OCR B Standard or OCR B Bitstream and click OK OCR B Standard fonts are rounder and typically used in the Western market OCR B Bitstream fonts are typically used in the Asian market 125 DeskPack Advanced Note If the OCR B Bitstream font is not installed on your system the option will be disabled Esko does not provide this font 7 6 2 Using Dynamic Content with Dynamic Barcodes You can use the Dynamic Content plug in to turn barcodes created with Dynamic Barcodes into XML driven objects These barcodes update automatically when the XML files to which they are linked change For more information see the Dynamic Content documentation 7 6 3 Barcode Protection Once you create a barcode with Dynamic Barcodes this barcode is protected This means that it won t be possible to edit it with most regular Illustrator tools This protects the barcode against modifications that
170. if Hor o er cba our ORI P RERO RE M ca RH Pau 231 10 5 Setting Instant Trapper Parameters ccc sss sese eene nennen 231 106 Tapon M E 2393 10 6 1 Using ine Trap toc Objects OOL scii toti den aude mtr benda Ub ri 233 10 5 2 ISIC the ap TOA XOOlsonicdntitcru steuert as eu orae Depto sv acai eet 236 10 6 3 WOMBINS ADS eie Rt etn rS E Ra Dexia Ea 239 TO 7 now Birmitatlols ctae ettet hd Retard n da att re ch nutus aeter butt 241 TT ED SOON essence itech bn rnc bb ia otn bcn ee a eee Staten elcid ain prac ndn etta Pon M 245 t M Greed ole E T RO TT 245 t2 The p DE JOE DIEGO SIE dan daha seb eine ui don Orla KRAMER uritur D Rt utero dr ao 246 Ux a a2 fle ed M c 246 11 4 High level information preserved by PDF Import e nnne 247 JEN MIU T ee ee eR ee le ee ee eed rec RE 247 BN Meet ANY AI VMS CUE SC S SEA a cate ennai tu ari cud idcm octobre sakes ae ena erras oe cients tote n e 248 DD sO TAS m T M 248 114 4 Object based SCreenilig oocoe i tra P m Pt bane nba eaqui Rb e un mena etu din ides 248 11 4 5 Structural Design CAD data sss eene 248 thA p A TOY Soars Sena ii stt Fontaines MO Me repa ualuit DN Ebor 248 WAST OKT AIG ONS oeste Hoan ptu tte t diente pattern andrea traut N iura peeidu enint 248 11 4 8 Linework with mixed DeviceN colors sse enne nnn nnne 249 ga xem Ela relM
171. ify button 4 In the Insert Field dialog that opens choose the fields to insert a b N choose a field Category for example Barcodes Date amp Time in that Category choose the Field you want to use see Categories and Types on page 203 for a list of available categories and fields if applicable choose the Format to use for your chosen Field see Formatting Dynamic Fields on page 207 for details _ 9 Note The Preview line shows how the field will be resolved in the current document d when you are satisfied with how your field will look like click OK The dynamic parts of a barcode will appear between square brackets Note Only the barcode s code can be changed after making You can not change the barcode type or other settings after creating a Mark from a bar code To change these settings you have to delete the Mark and create a new one White Underprint allows to add White Underprint to your Mark See White Underprint on page 212 White Underprint White Underprint allows you to create a white background underneath the selected marks This white background can be necessary when printing on transparent or metal material White Underprint is available for Text Marks Barcode Marks and Grid Marks 2 pe LeskPack Advanced ES White Underprint Object White Underprint objects will be created in a top level White Underprint layer and will be put in overprint The White Underprint object will be
172. ign file If a structural design file is already loaded and you place a new structural design file the new structural design file will replace the old structural design file This implies that you can never have more than one structural design file in an Illustrator document The difference between placing and opening a structural design file When opening a structural design file the artboard will adopt the size of the bounding box of the structure When placing a structural design file the artboard will not be changed Open or Place from Shapes You can open files from Shapes directly or place them into existing lllustrator files by using the commands in File Structural Design 31 3 3 LDeskPack Advanced itor Edit Object Type Select Effect View Window Help ig New EN New from Template t 88N Open 92 fle lai Opacity 100 5 Dacument Setup J Open Recent Files i Untitled 1 300 CMYK Pre dA Browse in Bridge X380 Share My Screen Device Central Close a6 W Save 6S Save As 1385 Save a Copy NS Save as Template Check In Save for Web amp Devices iPS Place Structural Design P Place File Place from Shapes Save for Microsoft Office Open from Shapes Export Show in Shapes Open In Visualizer i Update Scripts Save as Document Setup HP Document Color Mode gt EskoArtwork XMP File I
173. ill select and or edit objects without loosing your collection Modifying a Collection You can modify the Collection using one of the functions in the fly out menu of the Collection palette e Click the Make New Collection button or select Make Collection from the fly out menu to forget the current collection and create a new collection based on the current selection e Select Clear Collection from the fly out menu to forget the current collection e Select one or more objects in the job and select Add Selection from the fly out menu to add the selected objects to the collection e Browse to an object in the collection and select Remove Selection from the fly out menu to remove the selected objects from the collection Note Objects that are removed in the job are automatically removed from the collection e Select Select All from the fly out menu to select all objects in the collection 4 2 4 Crosshair Tool GO DeskPack Advanced Crosshair Palette The Crosshair palette allows you to create Origin Guide rules intersecting x and y guide lines These guide lines can be rotated and positioned anywhere within the Adobe Illustrator drawing area Objects within the drawing can be snapped to position along the guides To select the Crosshair palette Choose Window gt Esko gt boostX gt Crosshair The boostX Crosshair palette appears EJ mar 4 HH H 7 omm Ah Horizontal Crosshair offset om Pos
174. in the list to select it in the file e double click that object to select it and zoom in on it in the file e double click the message to select and zoom in on all objects it relates to in the file 3 8 2 Filtering the Messages You can show or hide certain types of messages using the palette s fly out menu e To hide e all informational messages select Hide Info Messages in the fly out menu e all warnings select Hide Warning Messages e allerrors select Hide Error Messages Hide Info Messages Hide Warning Messages Hide Error Messages Show All Clear Save Messages as e To show them again select either e Show Info Messages e Show Warning Messages e Show Error Messages Show Info Messages Show Warning Messages Hide Error Messages Show All Clear Save Messages as 64 e To only show the last message select Show Last in the fly out menu e To show all messages again select Show All When showing all messages you can see Show All at the bottom right of the palette Messages x LDeskPack Advanced Message 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 jPugn Hime D e Linked file Users steve Documents 5G5 Color Strategies Team ApplePie High PDF Export 11 43 27 al D o Font StoneSans is missing PDF Export 11 43 27 D a Font StoneSans Semibold is missing PDF Export 11 43 27 D Ce Font Futura CondensedLight is missing PDF Export 11 43 27 D e Font Futura Condensed is
175. ined value the stroke will be assigned negative regardless of the underlying color Finally the detection of a negative line or color for negative fonts is based on the sum of all ink percentages and so NOT on the luminance of an object 5 yellow is as negative as 5 black or 2 cyan plus 3 magenta 12 2 4 Units Note Preflight for Illustrator adapts the Units and Undo settings from the Al preferences menu 12 3 The Window Submenu Help New Window Arrange Preferences j x Li Workspace E CMYK Preview Extensions P Bait 93 33 CMYK Preview Application Frame v Application Bar v Control v Tools Actions Align TF7 v Appearance amp Fe Artboards Attributes 3 F11 Brushes F5 Color F6 Color Guide OF3 Document Info boostX Flattener Preview Channel Mapping Gradient F9 Collection Graphic Styles OFS Color Engine b Info 88 F8 Dynamic Barcodes Layers F7 Dynamic Panels Links Dynamic Tables Magic Wand Image Extractor P Navigator Image Mask Pathfinder QEFI Ink Manager XEF Separations Preview v Messages Stroke Ff10 PowerLayout X SBL SVG Interactivity PowerTrapper p Swatches Thin Parts Symbols Q F11 Collect Files Transform Fs Seamless Repeat WX 38A Preflight Parameters Transparency 36 r10 Shuttle Validator Type b Structural Design P Font List Variables Trim Box and Media Box Variable Data Brush Libraries Viewer gt Graphic Style Libraries b White Un
176. ing Several Objects to All Adjoining Objects e To spread several objects to the background and foreground to all objects under or on top of them drag a rectangle around these objects e To choke several objects with the background and foreground hold Option while dragging the rectangle around the objects e To spread several objects to the background only to all objects under it hold Shift while dragging the rectangle e To choke several objects with the background hold Option and Shift while dragging the rectangle 238 DeskPack Advanced Note Instant Trapper treats an object and its stroke as two different objects When spreading a fill object and a stroke object to the background Instant Trapper will only spread the stroke object to the background as it is between the fill object and the background It will not spread the fill object to the stroke object as the stroke object is on top of the fill object in the file 10 6 3 Combined Traps When trapping an object to two or more other objects you can use Combined Trapping to get a smoother connection between the different traps and thus a better visual result Use this in particular to trap an object to other objects intersecting with each other In the example below you can see the difference between trapping with separate actions and Combined Trapping when spreading an object to two intersecting objects e When using two separate trapping actions you m
177. int list change the coordinates for the Inspection point 3 7 2 Adding and changing Inspection boxes The Inspection Setup palette shows all the Inspection boxes Select the Inspection Setup tool from the Illustrator toolbar and click and drag in the job to insert a new Inspection box The Inspection box will be visible in the job with its number next to it When creating a new Inspection box the Default Profile is used Select an Inspection box in the palette to highlight the corresponding Inspection box on the Illustrator job You can select multiple Inspection boxes Select one or more Inspection boxes and click the delete button to delete the Inspection boxes You can manually change the Profile You can move or change an Inspection box in different ways e Click on the center point of the Inspection box and drag it to move the Inspection box to a new location e Click one of the 8 handles on the Inspection box and drag to modify the Inspection box 3 3 Dynamic Art Placeholders The Dynamic Art section of the Inspection Setup palette shows all Dynamic Art placeholders defined in the job Enable the checkbox in front of a Dynamic Art placeholder to use it as an Inspection box When adding a Dynamic Art placeholder the Default Profile is used Select a Dynamic Art placeholder in the list to highlight the corresponding Dynamic Art placeholder on the Illustrator job You can select multiple Dynamic Art placeholders You c
178. int that should be positioned on the ruler anchor point here in the blue circle Click the Alignment button and select Align From Ruler The files are now aligned Note Depending on how precisely you defined the second ruler point you may have to zoom in and repeat the alignment procedure to align your files with more precision Auto Align from Ruler Auto Align from Ruler is used the same way as the Align from Ruler tool but is more accurate at high resolution 301 14 S K O X DeskPack Advanced If the details of the alignment points match the viewer will be able to increase the alignment precision and have a good alignment with fewer iterations Auto Align Auto Align does not use the ruler but rather the currently visible view of the two compared images to attempt an automatic alignment For convenience a separate tool button is available to perform an Auto Align operation without having to open the Alignment pop up menu Clicking this button will perform an Auto Align from Ruler if a ruler selection is active otherwise an Auto Align from view 14 6 5 Viewer Compare Preferences You can open the Compare Preferences by choosing Illustrator gt Preferences gt Esko gt Viewer Compare Preferences on Mac OS or Edit Preferences Esko Viewer Compare Preferences on Windows You can define the resolution for the Viewer Compare previews either based on the document size or at a fixed resolution B
179. is you have to create these symbols again manually Existing marks will NOT be affected since the symbol is internally copied in the file when creating the mark or when setting a different symbol This also means that you can open a file with marks using custom symbols saved in your local DynamicMarks ai file on another computer without loosing the marks 22 EN E S K O x DeskPack Advanced 9 Image Extractor 9 1 Introduction This plug in allows you to make internal images external in Adobe Illustrator You can select an internal image in the document and export it The internal image will be replaced by the link to the outside image The reverse operation make external images internal is supported by this plug in for Esko CTs only You will be asked to select the format of the external file TIFF DCS2 Photoshop DCS2 or Esko CT Formats not suitable for the image data are disabled Part of the Image Extractor for Illustrator plug in is support for placing embedding linking Esko CT file formats into the Illustrator document This document contains the following topics e Supported embedded raster image types e mage Extractor for Illustrator workflow e Other features 9 2 Supported embedded raster image types e bit rasters e GrayScale optional alpha e CMYK CMYK alpha including PDF for Illustrator e Device N e PDF for Illustrator e Photoshop PSD embedded object every spot layer has its ow
180. is both a productivity and a QA tool It allows you to quickly select all elements in the file or sub select within a selection that comply with your criteria color object type appearance and even the shape of the object Use it as a QA tool to trace elements in your document that are outside the printing specifications small text thin lines Click Select gt Esko gt Select By Attributes to open the Select By Attributes palette Why Select by Attributes By combining multiple selection criteria in the Select by Attributes panel you can create your own special tailor made selection filter 44 SELECT BY ATTRIBUTES ied Object Type General Attributes gt Fill and Stroke Appearance Color Deselert E Refine E Select E Tolle The Select By Attributes option comes with four buttons Select Refine Deselect and Collect e Select Select all objects in the document that match the criteria that are currently selected e Refine Refine the current selection by adding additional selection criteria This allows you to quickly fine tune your result e Deselect Deselect all objects that match the new selection criteria within the current selection e Collect Make a Collection of all the objects in the document that match the criteria that are curently selected See Collection on page 79 Selection groups The following groups of selection criteria are available e Object Ty
181. ith a different width on the inside and outside of the object You can open the dialog by choosing Window gt Esko gt boostX gt Inner Outer Strokes Note Inner Outer Stroke is disabled if the selected object doesn t allow Inner Outer Stroke such as an image object or text INNER OUTER STROKES Inner Width 2et Outer Width set Color BE Overprint Miter Limit Amy 68 DeskPack Advanced The Inner Width sets the distance from the original object to the inside the Outer Width to the outside The Corner buttons option allows you to change how the stroke s sharp corners will be handled e Round L default a round cap will be placed at all corners cl Beveled this will cut sharp corners off Mitered this option works with a miter ratio The miter ratio serves to limit the length of the sharp corner the distance from the base of the stroke to the corner point The default miter ratio value is 4 This means that if the length of the sharp corner is more than 4 times the distance then the corner will be cut off beveled If it is less than 4 times the distance the corner will be left as it is D a Mitered Miter Ratio 4 Mitered Miter Ratio 3 BETTE Round Beveled The Color allows to define the color for the Inner Outer Stroke You can double click the color to open the Adobe Illustrator Color Picker or you can drag and drop a color patch from Adobe Illustrator owatc
182. ition of the x axis crosshair guide line positioned from the drawing origin point Vertical Crosshair Tem offset Position of the y axis crosshair guide line positioned from the drawing origin point Crosshair Rotation geo Specify rotation angle of Crosshair Guide lines 45 degrees to 45 degrees around the Horizontal and Vertical intersection point 1 Align Art Selected objects will be positioned to Crosshair guides according to Crosshair alignment options 2 Align Crosshair Crosshair guides will be positioned to selected objects according to Crosshair alignment options 3 All Directions Objects will be positioned along both Crosshair guides Choose a position from the Alignment Position Window All 9 Alignment Position Buttons are active 4 Align Vertical Objects will be positioned along the vertical crosshair guide Choose a position from the Alignment Position Window Center vertical Alignment Position Buttons are active 5 Align Horizontal Objects will be positioned along the horizontal crosshair guide Choose a position from the Alignment Position Window Center Horizontal Alignment Position Buttons are active 81 ESKO NEM 82 6 Visual Bounds Objects are aligned along the object s paint attributes using the outside of the stroke width 7 Transformation Bounds Objects are aligned using the object s actual artwork path ignoring the paint attributes of the objects 8 Align Ruler The dra
183. k Names Abbreviated Ink Names Ink Types Ink Dotshapes Ink Angles Ink Rulings Printing Method Placed Files XML Content Files otructural Design File Illustrator Version Creative Suite Version OS Type OS Version Short User Name Full User Name Server Variables File Info Job Info DeskPack Advanced ES Extension of File File File Type First Folder of File Folder of File Folder of Input Job Name Order ID Sub Order ID Description Due Date Project ID Last Actor Job URL Category Category2 Category3 Category4 Category5 Category6 Category Customer Ref CSR CSR Email Customer ID Customer Name Customer Description Due Day Due Time Job Container Name Job Container URL Job CT URL Job ID Name of Folder of Job JI Legacy Job JDF Jl Originator JDF PS Printer Name PS Printer Name JDF Job Parameters Number of Barcodes Barcode Type Barcode Code Bar Width Reduction Barcode Magnification Barcode Device Compensation Barcode Narrow Bar 205 206 Global Misc Path Info Product Info Job Barcodes LDeskPack Advanced Number of Inks Number of Technical Inks Ink Names Technical Ink Names Short Ink Names Ink Types Ink Dotshapes Ink Angles Ink Rulings Ink Printing Methods lt user defined smart names gt Server File URL Job Temp URL URL Folder of Input URL of Input Customer s Product Reference Product Amount Product Custom Field 1 Pr
184. ked is a variation of the GS1 DataBar barcode that is stacked in two rows and used when the normal barcode would be too wide for the product 000000DO U0 012000000 Parameters General Parameters e Rotation on page 170 e Code on page 170 e Composite Component on page 171 Text Parameters 149 ESKO NEM 144 e Add Human Readable Characters on page 171 e Multiple Text Lines on page 172 e Font Family Style and Size on page 172 e Alignment on page 173 e Vertical Offset on page 173 Additional Parameters e Bar Width Reduction on page 174 e Device Compensation on page 174 e Narrow Bar on page 177 e Snap Bars to Output Resolution on page 178 GS1 DataBar Stacked Omnidirectional About this Barcode GS1 DataBar14 Stacked Omnidirectional is taller version of GS1 DataBar14 Stacked that can be read by omnidirectional scanners 01300D00DODDOODOU Parameters General Parameters e Rotation on page 170 e Code on page 170 e Composite Component on page 171 Text Parameters e Add Human Readable Characters on page 171 e Puton Top on page 172 e Multiple Text Lines on page 172 e Font Family Style and Size on page 172 e Alignment on page 173 DeskPack Advanced e Vertical Offset on page 173 Additional Parameters e Bar Width Reduction on page 174 e Device Compensation on page 174 e Narrow Bar on page 177 e Snap Bars to Output Resolution on page 178 GS1 DataBar Truncated About this Barcode
185. l amp Stroke filter will separate the text object into two independent text objects The result is one text object with only a fill and another text object with only a stroke 4 5 Heplacing Contour The Replace Contour Tool allows you to create new objects by combining two objects a closed path object with an open path Replace Contour X oF ESKO NEM To use boostX Replace ContourContour Choose Window gt Esko gt boostX gt Replace Contour The Replace Contour Palette appears 1 Select a closed path object and an open path and click the Keep Biggest button Keep Biggest creates a single merged shape excluding the large closed path The new shape is the larger of the two objects calculated by area 2 Select a closed path object and an open path and click the Keep Smallest button Keep Smallest creates a single merged shape excluding the small closed path The new shape is the smaller of the two objects calculated by area 3 Select a closed path object and an open path and click the Keep Both button Keep Both creates two shapes The new shape is the combination of both the larger and smaller area objects Cla sed path object and open path Replace Contour Section Small Object Replace Contour Section Large Object b NG a Replace Contour Section Both Objects ty 4 6 Inner Outer Stroke The Inner Outer Stroke allows to create strokes w
186. l Readable Documents Cancel After opening a structural design the structural design objects are converted to special Illustrator objects that cannot be modified accidentally The structural design layers are converted to locked Illustrator sublayers You can unlock these layers They are grouped under a layer that gets the name of the structural design file 29 3 SO lil Main Design Bleed Outline 7 Dimensions E Overall dimensions gt tx Main Design gt _ Main Design Layer 1 Layer 1 Text amp Dimensions Generic special rule Cut Nick Crease Print registration Second Height Crease Matrix Crease Partial Cut Generic Cut and Crease Generic Perf in Channel Glue assist Reverse crease Reverse partial cut Partial cut and crease Half crease Side bevel Outside bleed ___ _ Inside bleed Outside coating _____Inside coating Print images Annotation Annotation2 Annotation3 Annotation4 Annotations Other lines DDeskPack Advanced The different structural design line styles cuts creases bleed are translated to hard coded custom colors All ArtiosCAD line styles are supported In case a Collada file is placed a check is performed to see if the Collada file has a printable part defined A printable part is an Esko extension to the Collada format Collada files with one or more printable parts can be created with Artios
187. lassicColors Ink Book to use the ClassicColors Ink Book When using a ClassicColors Ink Book for your HP device you can enable the Use ClassicColors Ink Book option to avoid conflicts for inks using generic names such as White 2 ESKO NEM The Preferred Ink Book is the Ink book shown by default when opening the Add Ink from Ink Book dialog 3 4 7 Known limitations oince DeskPack Suite 10 1 Assembly 6 InkManager has been using different method for the ink converting The new method uses Illustrator s Appearance allowing multiple fills and stroke in a single object instead of creating temporary inks BG Inks Beside many advantages it brings a couple of limitations having connection with the Illustrator limitations or behavior Re mapping process inks to spot inks As it is impossible to simply change one of the process inks to the spot ink the only solution is adding a new fill to the object with the new spot ink and use overprint to mix these fills together e Adding a brand new fill is not possible on text objects on the character level Text objects using various inks on separate characters aren t mapped and an operator is warned e Re mapping of process to spot inks on paths using Effects on fill or stroke will raise a warning because adding a new fill could change the visual appearance Re mapping inks in gradients He mapping of the process ink to the spot ink generates a new fill due to the same reason as before
188. lect Path Select objects based on the path type Open Closed or Compound Using Any option the selection is made between objects which are Open Closed or Compound Text Select all text or all text smaller than the point size you specify in the Text field Symbol Select all the objects that are Adobe Illustrator symbols Linked File Select objects or images which have been linked to and not embedded into the Adobe Illustrator file Image Selects all placed image files of the file type defined in the list The image has to be embedded in the file Mesh Select all objects that are Adobe Illustrator Mesh objects Dynamic Barcodes Select dynamic barcode objects generated by the Esko Dynamic Barcodes plug in Dynamic Table Select dynamic table objects generated by the Esko Dynamic Tables plug in Dynamic Object Select XML driven dynamic objects generated by the Esko Dynamic Content plug in DeskPack Advanced Thin Part Fix Select objects created by using the Fix button in the Thin Parts function of the Preflight For Illustrator plugin 12 6 2 General Attributes The General Attributes group has three options SELECT BY ATTRIBUTES Object Type General Attributes Name Size Smaller than HH omm Shape Similar as Selected Object Hd Fill and Stroke Appearance gt Color Deseleet f MA IC Colet T a D Y T Name Select an object by typing
189. lect it in the Barcode Type parameter This displays parameters specific to this barcode type in the Dynamic Barcodes dialog 133 ESKOS 134 20O About this Barcode DeskPack Advanced 2 of 5 is a numeric self checking barcode which can have a variable length This barcode only encodes data in the bars It is used for industrial applications article numbering photo development and ticketing TIT Parameters General Parameters e Rotation on page 170 e Code on page 170 Text Parameters e Add Human Readable Characters on page 171 e Font Family Style and Size on page 172 e Alignment on page 173 e Vertical Offset on page 173 Additional Parameters e Bar Width Reduction on page 174 e Device Compensation on page 174 e Height on page 175 e Characters per unit on page 175 e Ratio on page 177 e Narrow Bar on page 177 e Snap Bars to Output Resolution on page 178 e Box on page 181 CLF 3 About this Barcode The CLF 8 barcode is part of the same barcode family as the Laetus Pharma Code It is used in the pharmaceutical industry DeskPack Advanced Parameters General Parameters e Rotation on page 170 e Code on page 170 Additional Parameters e Bar Width Reduction on page 174 e Device Compensation on page 174 e Height on page 175 e Ratio on page 177 e Narrow Bar on page 177 e Wide Bar on page 177 e Gap on page 177 e Snap Bars to Output Resolution on page 178 e Decimal Input on page 178 Cod
190. lled Images e your copy of Illustrator with PDF Export is on a Mac and the shared folder containing the images is mounted as Hi Res Images e the Normalized PDF you export will be used on a PC where the shared folder containing the images is mounted as Shared Images Server A uw Images 7 lj N A JU N N M E ON PC N d X N MAC fT O Hi Res Images 1 Shared Images JU J The link to an image called My Image psd is Server Hi Res Images My Image psd on the Mac and should be NNServerNShared ImagesMMy Image psd on the PC n ul When adding the Server Mapping in the OPI And Server Mapping dialog you should enter the Share Details as follows by e name ofthe file server in Server Name e name of the shared folder containing the images as seen from your local Mac in Local Share e name of the shared folder containing the images as seen from the other PC in Server Share DeskPack Advanced Share Details Server Name Server i Local Share Hi Res Images i Server Share Shared Images i Zim aed CO i Note e You can use subfolders in a Server Mapping Share Details Server Name Server B Local Share Hi Res Images Hu Server Share ImagesVXHi Res TT a e You can also use Server Mappings to replace images for example to swap low resolution for high resolution images when the low resolution an
191. llows you to set the technical parameters of the inks Thanks to InkManager every ink can have its own type ruling angle and dotshape set For some objects Screening for Illustrator allows you to make exceptions to these inks parameters 13 3 Screening for Illustrator workflow The Screening for Illustrator workflow 1 InkManager shows you the actual settings of all inks 20 13 LDeskPack Advanced INK MANAGER Ink Name y Ink Book Ruling 1 Process Cyan process 120 00 2 Process Yellow process 120 00 3 Process Black process 120 00 Base Inks 3 2 Select the objects of which you want to change the ink settings 3 On the menu select Window Esko Screening The Change Ink Options dialog appears Change Ink Options Ink Name Ruling Angle Dotshape Apply To All None 0 Process Yellow 120 7 5 Elliptical E PA Process Black 1120 82 5 Elliptical E MA ET Changing options may result in a new ink variant eT Cancel The dialog shows you all inks that are used in the selected objects including their ruling angle and dotshape You can change the settings of these inks You can either change one specific ink or set the value to all inks by using the Apply To All edit boxes If several technical parameters of one ink correspond to the selection the appropriate edits in the Change Ink Options are empty 4 After applying the inks the specific ink s
192. lor or to process colors The Ink Manager palette also allows you to specify crucial ink parameters such as the ink type angle and lineature Once defined these parameters are saved inside the Illustrator document Note Screening for Illustrator allows you to make exceptions to these ink parameters With Screening for Illustrator objects can have different settings for ruling angle and dotshape Please refer to the Screening for Illustrator documentation for more information To use the Ink Manager palette choose Window gt Esko gt Ink Manager The Ink Manager palette appears 21 3 LDeskPack Advanced Ink Book Dotshape Printing Method Process Cyan process Round Fogra R Process Magenta process Round Fogra RJ Process Yellow process Round Fogra R Process Black process Round Fogra R PANTONE Orange 021 C PANTONE Solid C SambaFlex 4 C54 PANTONE Hexachrome Green U PANTONE Solid U SambaFlex 4 C54 Base Inks 6 Delete Ink Variant To delete an Ink Variant made with Screening for Illustrator select the ink variant which needs to be removed and click the Delete Ink Variant button The objects will get the ink settings of the parent ink EF Refresh To update the lists of inks used within your document click the Refresh button After modifying a document click the refresh button to update the list of used inks 1 Select To identify objects containing specific inks within a job select
193. lready in the Dynamic Marks palette an error message will be given and the Mark Set will not be loaded The marks from the loaded Mark Set are added in the Dynamic Marks palette If you want to replace the current marks with the ones from the loaded Mark Set you need to select all marks and delete them first If you load marks with dependencies the mark will be attached to the object e g PowerLayout Grid or Named Art with the same name as in the Mark Set file If no such object exists you will get an error message and the mark will be attached to the Trim Box 8 5 2 Save Mark Set To save a Mark Set 214 DeskPack Advanced ES 1 In the Fly out menu of the Dynamic Marks palette select Save Mark Set Save Dynamic Mark Set TestSet E u 2 8 Cancel Mi ne Name Mark Set The Save dialog will show the Mark Sets already saved at the location defined in the Dynamic Mark Preferences See Dynamic Marks Preferences on page 216 2 Enter a name for the Mark Set and click Save If a Mark Set with this name already exists you will get the option to overwrite it Note You can only save a Mark set if the Illustrator file is saved If not you will be prompted to do so before saving the Mark Set Mark Sets are saved as simple ai documents containing only the objects needed for the Mark Set Note All Marks in a set need to have a unique name If not an error message is shown and the Mark Set is not saved
194. lt click the palette menu in the top right corner of the Dynamic Barcodes dialog then click Set Default Parameters 117 Aa ESKOG DeskPack Advanced Dynamic Barcodes Reset to Default Parameters barcode Type uz Rotation Iv Code 7 Text parameters Vf Add Human Readable Characters v Light Margin Indicator gt Font Family default font Font Style Size 12 pt ppe T Vertical Offset 0 mm 7 Additional parameters Bar Width Reduction 0 Device Compensation NENNEN Magnification Height 25 933 mm Snap Bars to Output Resolution JE ar 2540 pp 0 mm Left 0 mm Box j mm EH Right mm a Bottom I Sotto Get Properties from Job Setup 7 5 4 Barcode Placeholders If you don t have the exact data to encode in your barcode yet you can already create a barcode placeholder in your design This placeholder will have the correct symbol type for the barcode type you choose but will only contain empty or default data for example 0000000000000 for EAN 13 D ODODDOD ODODOL gt Creating a Barcode Placeholder Quickly 1 Open the Dynamic Barcodes dialog from Windows Esko Dynamic Barcodes 2 Define the color of the barcode in your Illustrator color palette define a single color fill style and no stroke 118 DeskPack Advanced X
195. ly the Ink name is shown When you show the details the type LPI angle and dotshape of the inks will also be shown e Show Hide Printing Method will show or hide the chosen Printing Method See Printing Method on page 25 e Show Hide Job Setup will show or hide the Job Setup column See Job Setup on page 26 e Reverse Ink Order will turn the order of the inks upside down e By default the process colors are in Cyan Magenta Yellow Black order If you change this order and apply Save CMYK Ink Order as Default the changed order will be used as default order By selecting Restore Default CMYK order the original default order is restored e By using Sort Light To Dark or Sort Dark To Light you can rearrange the order of inks based on the luminocity Note that Opaque and Technical inks are placed at the bottom of the list but also sorted light to dark or dark to light 3 4 4 Printing Method You can set the Printing Method for every ink The Printing Method information can be used in SmartNames or for Automation Engine task that handle the printing method By default the Printing Method column is hidden By selecting Show Printing Method in the fly out menu you can make it visible You can change the Printing Method in the Ink Manager palette You can select one of the predefined printing methods or create a new printing method 25 ESKO NEM Presets As from version 12 1 2 when connected to an Automation Engine Serv
196. m Dmm vi Repeat every 1 Column Symbol 3 1 Set Symbol Be Ctses 7 White Underprint W white Underprint Ink Settings er Add Bar Position Grid Marks will be automatically attached to a currently selected PowerLayout Standalone grid If no grid is selected you will get an error message Mark Positions amp Copies Using the Where buttons you can define where you want the Grid Marks e on the left side of the Repeat e on the right side of the Repeat e ontop of the Repeat e below the Repeat e in between the columns e in between the rows Note The in between options can not be used in combination with stagger If you enable stagger while grid marks are set to in between or if you load a mark set containing such a mark the grid marks will be placed at the side and a warning will be given de ES E S K O x DeskPack Advanced 198 For the Mark Position you can besides the normal Position settings set the Reference The Heference defines what cell or column to use as a reference You can set the Reference to Outer Left Cell or Outer Right Cell or to Outer Left Column or Outer Right Column If the Grid Marks are placed on the top or bottom of the repeat the options become top bottom instead of left right and Row instead of Column If a Column is used a single Grid Mark is placed using the column as reference In case you use a Cell as Reference you can choose to
197. m Shapes Save for Microsoft Office Open from Shapes Export p Show in Finder HIE eee Scripts Save as Document Setup AP Export Selected Objects to ArtiosCAD File Document Color Mode iz EskoArtwork XMP File Info xI Print AF Align Structure and Graphics Interactive Move Structural Design tool 35 ESKO NEM 36 The Move Structural Design tool has been added underneath the Illustrator select tool Select this tool to move the structural design interactively without unlocking the structural design layers Hold down the mouse button and drag to move the structural design Tip If you choose View gt Smart Guides the structural design will snap to the graphics Structural Design window LE Sas nr 324 mm Print Side Front Structure W 519 mm H 351mm Bleed Offset mm x Fold angles defined z Animation mot defined The Structural Design palette provides information on the structural design file s bleed and structure contours and it allows you to rotate or numerically move the contours Open the palette by choosing Window gt Esko gt Structural Design gt Show Structural Design Window The upper part gives you the coordinates of the left top point of the bounding box around the structure contour The coordinates are relative to the origin of the Illustrator file You can choose to see the coordinates of nine points on the b
198. malized PDF file as regular PDF Comments and will show up as Sticky notes in Adobe Acrobat Sticky notes created in Acrobat will also show up in Adobe Illustrator while other types of comments text corrections highlights and note properties or statusses are disregarded when opening a PDF file in Adobe Illustrator When importing a Normalized PDF containing notes created in ArtPro PackEdge Plato or DeskPack these notes will also show up in Adobe Illustrator 201 Bl SKoOo Pi DeskPack Advanced Notes in Adobe lllustrator When selecting the Notes tool from the toolbox all Notes become visible in the document A note consists of two parts the Note itself the yellow balloon indicating the location of the note and the Note Pop up containing text the name of the user that created it and the time of creation When hovering over a note the Note Pop up is temporarily shown When clicking the note the Note Pop up is opened and you can edit its content It will stay open until you close it using the X button Adding and editing notes e To create a note select the Note tool and click in your document e To move a note click and drag the note e Select another tool to hide all notes and note pop ups Selecting the Note tool will make all notes visible again The note pop ups that were open before will be reopened e To delete a note hover over the note and click the red cross e To hide a note pop
199. marks or registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners Pantone is a wholly owned subsidiary of X Rite Incorporated 9 Pantone LLC 2015 All rights reserved This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group Portions of this software are copyright 9 1996 2002 The FreeType Project www freetype org All rights reserved Portions of this software are copyright 2006 Feeling Software copyright 2005 2006 Autodesk Media Entertainment Portions of this software are copyright 91998 2003 Daniel Veillard All rights reserved Portions of this software are copyright 91999 2006 The Botan Project All rights reserved Part of the software embedded in this product is gSOAP software Portions created by gSOAP are Copyright 92001 2004 Robert A van Engelen Genivia inc All rights reserved Portions of this software are copyright 91998 2008 The OpenSSL Project and 1995 1998 Eric Young eayQcryptsoft com All rights reserved This product includes software developed by the Apache Software Foundation http www apache org Adobe the Adobe logo Acrobat the Acrobat logo Adobe Creative Suite Illustrator InDesign PDF Photoshop PostScript XMP and the Powered by XMP logo are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and or other countries Microsoft and the Microsoft logo are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and o
200. mat Paraf Italy barcodes in decimal format should start with an A included automatically by Dynamic Barcodes have 8 digits of data and end with a check digit calculated automatically by Dynamic Barcodes Parameters General Parameters e Rotation on page 170 e Code on page 170 Additional Parameters e Bar Width Reduction on page 174 e Device Compensation on page 174 e Height on page 175 e Narrow Bar on page 177 e Snap Bars to Output Resolution on page 178 e Box on page 181 PDF417 About this Barcode PDF417 isa 2D barcode mainly used in security printing passports identity cards driving licences It is a self checking barcode that can have different levels of error correction It can encode data using one of three compaction modes Text to encode all alphanumeric and punctuation characters in the ISO 8859 1 character set Numeric to encode only numeric characters or Binary to encode 8 bit characters It can use the three compaction modes in a single barcode if necessary but you can choose to disable the Text and or Numeric compaction modes lS RRR d Parameters General Parameters e Rotation on page 170 e Code on page 170 Additional Parameters e Bar Width Reduction on page 174 159 ESKO NEM e Device Compensation on page 174 e Height on page 175 e Narrow Bar on page 177 e Box on page 181 Specific Parameters Columns You can give your barcode between 1 and 30 Columns The
201. ment and open the XMP information as explained below If you have Automation Engine File gt Info PackEdge File gt XMP Info the Esko XMP plug in in Adobe Acrobat Esko gt XMP Document Info 3 Click Barcodes in the Data type column as below in PackEdge to show the barcode information 125 ESKO NEM XMP Info Extemnal References Data type Barcodes EAN 13 Code 1234557831231 Bar Width Reduction 0 0 Device Compensation 0 0 Magnification 1 0 Resolution 2540 Powered B ym y View Source S awe Close For more information see the Shuttle Automation Engine PackEdge or XMP plug in documentation Editing Barcodes in Other Esko Applications The Dynamic Barcodes functionality is available both as a DeskPack plug in and in PackEdge e To edit your document containing barcodes in PackEdge a Export your Illustrator document to the Esko Normalized PDF format e f you have Automation Engine use Shuttle to launch the document into your chosen workflow This converts it to Normalized PDF automatically Note See the Adobe Illustrator Client documentation for setup information e f you don t have Automation Engine use File Export and choose Normalized PDF as the export format b Open your document in PackEdge c Go to Production gt Bar Code to edit your barcode as you would edit it with Dynamic Barcodes For more information see the Shuttle and PackEdge documentation 126
202. meter measurement on plate or on print In fact this value is implicitly chosen by the person who set up the DGC and plate making Typical values range from 0 496 to 1 696 Adobe Illustrator uses 8 bit precision yielding 256 different possible gray values A single gray value in an image may make the difference between a dot or no dot on a flexo plate To allow for this precision Viewer uses percentages with one decimal digit 8 bit gray value in Illustrator 0 1 2 3 254 255 Percentage 0 096 0 496 0 896 1 296 99 6 100 Note If you do not specify a first dot you will not be able to use the following Viewer view modes for this press setting e The Flexo Plate Preview e The Flexo Print Preview Dot Gain in Highlights When you have specified a First Dot job percentage you can also specify how dark it should actually print Enable Dot Gain In Highlights and specify the dot gain parameters DeskPack Advanced e First Dot Prints As indicates the dot gain for the first dot Typical values range from 5 to 15 depending on the substrate The value is a job percentage that will print on an ideal reference press as dark as the first dot prints on this press e Range while the previous value measured the amount of dot gain in the highlights this value expresses how far this effect penetrates into the midtones Typically plate making is configured in such a way that the mid tones print like an offset press
203. mic Marks in the open document will be changed as well The White Underprint ink definition is saved in the Mark Set If you load a Mark Set containing a different White Underprint ink definition as in the open document you can choose if you want to keep your White Underprint ink or if you want to load the White Underprint ink definition from the Mark Set 8 5 Mark Sets When no mark set is loaded you get the option to load a mark set or to create a new set From the Fly out menu of the Dynamic Marks palette you can e Load a Mark Set e Save the current Mark Set e Delete the current Mark Set 219 ES E S K O x DeskPack Advanced e Manage Mark Sets 8 5 1 Load Mark Set To load a Mark Set 1 In the Fly out menu of the Dynamic Marks palette select Load Mark Set Load Dynamic Mark Set Mark Set 1 Esko Mark Set 2 Esko Mark Set 3 Esko Mark Set 4 Esko Mark Set 5 Esko Mark Set TestSet The Load dialog will show the Esko Default Mark Sets and Mark Sets saved at the location defined in the Dynamic Mark Preferences See Esko Mark Sets on page 217 and Dynamic Marks Preferences on page 216 Note Since Mark Sets are regular ai documents the list will show all Adobe lllustrator files at the defined location When loading an Illustrator file that doesn t contain a Mark Set nothing will happen 2 Select a Mark Set from the list and click Load Note If the Mark Set contains a mark with the same name as a mark a
204. might render it invalid for example distorting it or modifying its size You can still edit the barcode s parameters at any time through the Dynamic Barcodes dialog Protecting a Barcode You can protect a Dynamic Barcodes barcode that has been unprotected or a barcode made in a previous version of Dynamic Barcodes Open the Dynamic Barcodes plug in Select the barcode to protect in your Illustrator document If necessary change its parameters in the Dynamic Barcodes dialog AA OO N Click the Apply button to apply the parameter changes and protect your barcode Tip You can use this to fix some invalid barcodes Handling a Barcode without Dynamic Barcodes Opening a Document Containing a Dynamic Barcodes Barcode without Dynamic Barcodes When opening a document containing a Dynamic Barcodes barcode in an Illustrator application that doesn t have the Dynamic Barcodes plug in you will get the following warning 123 124 DeskPack Advanced Adobe Illustrator The document EANT3 ai contains elements that are managed by plug ins that are not currently available You can delete or expand these elements but you cannot manipulate them in other ways The missing plug ins are listed below EskoArtwork barx Plug in bar amp MAIL 3r aip E Don t Show Again This doesn t create any problem in your file and you can continue to work with this file as you normally would without editing the Dynamic Barcodes
205. missing PDF Export 11 43 27 D e Font Futura CondensedBold is missing POF Export 11 43 27 D e Font HardwoodLP is missing PDF Export 11 43 26 D a Font Helvetica Condensed Bold is missing PDF Export 11 43 26 D o Font Halvetica Condensed is missing PDF Export 11 43 26 D e Font Helvetica Black is missing PDF Export 11 43 26 D Ce Font Helvetica Condensed Black is missing PDF Export 11 43 26 D e Font Utopia Boldltalic is missing PDF Expart 11 43 24 Show All When filtering messages for example filtering out the warning messages or showing only the last message you can see Show Filtered at the bottom right of the palette Messages x D e Linked file Users steve Documents 5G5 Color Strategies Team ApplePie High PDF Export 11 43 27 D Linked file Users steve Documents 5GS Color Strategies Team ApplePie High trapX i 11 42 50 D e Linked file Users steve Documents 5GS Color Strategies Team ApplePie High trapX i 11 41 23 Show Filtered 3 8 3 Saving the Messages To save all messages in a text file 1 Select Save Messages as in the fly out menu 65 ESKO NEM 2 In the browser window that opens choose the name and location to use for saving your file 3 8 4 Clearing the Messages e To remove all messages from the Messages palette select Clear in the fly out menu o 9 Esko Document Setup By choosing File Esko Document Setup you can open the Esko Document Setup dialog The set
206. mit Note Technical Inks are not taken into account See also Technical inks in Viewer on page 295 14 4 4 Flexo Plate If you change the Viewer Preview mode to Flexo Plate a single separation by default the first in the list will be shown as a simulated flexo plate Note In this Preview mode only one separation can be viewed at a time 291 IB amp okoo DeskPack Advanced Note Viewer uses the same technology as the Esko Flexo Tools for Photoshop ENERGY ORINK F te w Y T n First Visible Dot The Flexo Plate preview will use the First Visible Dot percentage from the press settings see Define Press Settings on page 282 Pixels with a percentage lower than the First Visible Dot percentage will be shown as areas without dots Pixels with a percentage equal or higher than the First Visible Dot percentage will be shown as areas with dots Plate Color The Flexo Plate preview predicts how clean your flexo plates will be Especially in very light or very dark areas you could end up with isolated dots or holes on the flexo plate and those areas are difficult to hold on the plate or the substrate You can choose the plate color Cyrel Red Blue Green or Safran Yellow or a High Contrast Blue amp White to match the type of plate you are using 14 4 5 Flexo Print This Viewer preview mode shows the effect of highlight dot gain on the image 292 DeskPack Advanced This effec
207. n either e Select the Trim and Media Box Tool from the Al tool palette Use the Trim and Media Box to click and drag the Trim and Media Box e Select the Trim and Media Box Tool from the Al tool palette e ALT drag scale from the center out e SHIFT drag constrained scaling of ESKO NEM e ALT SHIFT drag constrained scaling from the center out OH Select a preset from the drop down menu OH Use the numeric input field The numeric input field appears when you select Move Trim Box and Media Box in the dropdown menu Move Trim Box and Media Box Distance Horizontal 100 pt Vertical 100 pt Cancel M Preview Tip Double clicking Trim and Media Box tool in toolpalette opens the Move Trim Box and Media Box dialog OR You could use one of the fit to options to Artboard artwork selection cad or crop area Tip The units are defined in the Illustrator preferences 3 6 3 All Page Boxes Using the All Page Boxes mode you can set all 5 page boxes Media Box Crop Box Bleed Box Trim Box and Art Box 58 DeskPack Advanced Media box this is the page format Crop box includes the Bleed box and all marks Bleed box defines the trimmed page plus the bleed Trim box this is the net document format Art box the Art box can be used to specify any section of the page ah ODN You can see the dimensions of all Page Boxes in the Page Box list You can
208. n in the Studio palette illustrator File Edit Object Type Select Filter Effect View Window Help S Wed 8 24AM Characters BAZA see6 P Character Zapfino M Ror pp feo A Parsoraph EEG Fash Text Opacity too P3 uv a White wine bottle ai 193 87 CMYK Brevi m Studio x Perd Hi W Sed at amp amp Double click a panel to display it in the document window a amp meu Victe Wine with Lea Bear ESSENCES SEE MeL ERSTE STERESERSTSEN IRA 2 7 6 Update the Structural Design File If the structural design file has been modified while still editing the Illustrator file an update of the otructural Design file can be forced A dedicated Update for Structural Design files is found in the File menu Choose File gt Structural Design gt Update 34 3 DeskPack Advanced or Edit Object Type Select Effect View Window Help New AN New from Template CHEN Open 0 4 epar ity 10 x Open Recent Files b GaelicGhost_6pack ard 150 C Browse in Bridge X20 I Share My Screen Device Central Close EW Save a5 Save As aS Save a Copy X 365 Save as Template Check In Save for Web amp Devices VOS Revert F12 Place Place File Place fro
209. n path art object e Device N alpha e PDF for Illustrator Rasters can be clipped Special effects and transparency are supported only in the simple raster images defined by one art object in Illustrator Due to Illustrator s limitations Device N embedded images are exported to TIFF file each time with empty CMYK channels 9 3 Image Extractor for Illustrator workflow There are two ways of exporting images e Export one image LE DeskPack Advanced e Export all images in the document 9 3 1 Export one image 1 Select the image you want to export 2 In the menu select Window gt Esko gt Image Extractor gt Export Image The following dialog appears Export Image File Format 4 DCS2 0 a Photoshop DCS2 0 Esko CT TIFF 3 Select the appropriate file format and click OK The standard Save As dialog appears 0 0 6 Export Image Save As untitled eps 4 a gt sg EJ L3 Subfolder A CY FAVORITES temporary Subfolder le f mazo V Applications DeskPack J DevTrack TestLink 5 Documents Instalator Format Encapsulated Postscript eps zal New Folder Cancel 4 Enter the name of the exported file and click Save The image will be exported and relinked to the exported file in Illustrator Ze EN E S K O x DeskPack Advanced Caution When you work in an A
210. n the file from the Automation Engine Job Folder For easy locating the file on the server you can use File Job Folder Open from Job folder For more information on how to connect to Automation Engine and on opening from a Job Folder we refer to the Esko DataExchange documentation See http help esko com products Esko9620Data 20Exchange 20for 20Adobe 20Illustrator 7 8 2 Connect Dynamic Barcodes to Job Setup Dycaniic Barcodes Barcode Type cop 128 O v cop 128 O v 128 EB iia C B Code cl gt Text parameters 7 Additional parameters Bar Width Reduction Device Compensation Height rr mnmdBi E rA Ite d LE ml d i arrow Bar Snap Bars to Output Resolution v Get Properties from Job Setup To use the Barcode properties from the Job Folder enable the Get Properties from Job Setup When enabled the icon on the right will indicate the status e Gray the feature is disabled e Green the connection is established 183 ESKO NEM e Red the file is not in a Job Folder or the connection is down 7 8 3 Use Barcode parameters from Job Setup To use the barcode parameters from Job Setup select a barcode type from the Barcode Type list that is defined in the Job setup You can recognize these barcode types by the green icon in front Dynamic Barcodes Barcode Type E731 CODE 128 Rotation Ey 2of5 Coded E CLF 5 CODABAR CODE 128 ee CODE
211. nable a Highlight option the objects are highlighted in the color you chose in the Color Picker 14 4 3 Total Area Coverage 290 The Total Area Coverage TAC is the sum of all separation densities at a certain point in your document TAC Limit The TAC Limit is the maximal Total Area Coverage that your document may contain This value depends on the press and the substrate your design will be printed on Your printer should provide you with the TAC Limit value to use Defining the TAC Limit 14 DeskPack Advanced The TAC limit is defined in the Press settings See Define Press Settings on page 282 By default the TAC Limit is set to 270 Viewing areas over the TAC Limit When you switch to the Total Area Coverage preview the image in the preview pane will be dimmed and all areas where the sum of the densities is higher than the TAC limit specified in the current Press Setting will be displayed in 100 black ENERGYDRIN Note You can Alt Control click Windows or Alt Command click Mac the black pixels to use the densitometer tool and to measure the actual TAC amount in that specific area See Measure Ink Densities on page 288 To quickly see the maximum TAC in your document use the TAC Limit slider Move the slider to the right to use a TAC Limit value higher than that used by your current Press Setting The more you move the slider to the right the less pixels will typically be over the TAC Li
212. nd as in the left picture below or Mitered as in the right picture below ww 5 Choose what you want to do when your file contains white objects e Leave Trap to White Objects enabled to be able to trap colored objects to white objects a white background e Disable Trap to White Objects if you don t want to trap colored objects to white objects a white background This will prevent you from accidentally trapping to white objects and will give a warning when you do 232 DeskPack Advanced Messages X Message O o 10 1 0 jPegn Time Ce No traps are generated ta the white Instant Trapper 8 03 23 Show All Note You can always trap a white object to another object as the trap will not be visible 10 6 Trapping Both the Trap to Objects and the Trap to All tools create traps in your document s Trap Layer If your document doesn t contain a trap layer Instant Trapper will create one Note The trap layer needs to be the topmost layer of your document and be called Trap Layer for Instant Trapper to recognize it If it isn t Instant Trapper will create a new trap layer on top of the other layers 10 6 1 Using the Trap to Objects Tool e You can find the Trap to Objects tool in Illustrator s Tools panel 233 10 c S K O X DeskPack Advanced Trapping an Object to Another Object e To spread an object to another object a click into the object to spread b drag the
213. ndicator This parameter adds lt and gt signs or only gt depending on the barcode type at the bottom of your barcode This indicates the width the barcode should have for optimal reading Il 2 12345678912343 gt Font Family Style and Size These options can be used to define the font family style and size to be used for the human readable characters By choosing default font all other Text Parameters are disabled as the default values are used DeskPack Advanced Note If the font used in a bar code is not available when opening the file Adobe Illustrator will warn about a missing font You can however only fix the problem using the Dynamic Barcode palette since Adobe Illustrator s Find Font feature can not be used Alignment When using human readable characters in combination with custom font settings you can set text alignment to Left Center or Right Vertical Offset This parameter allows you to add extra space between your barcode bars and the human readable characters CO 00000000000000 a13500000000000000 Note When opening your document in PackEdge the characters will be placed just below the bars again Use 992 Prod Family in UPC Enable this parameter to use the special 992 product family in your barcode for specific offers like discounts on the customer s n
214. nfo X ir 38 Print AP You can choose a new Shape to download and purchase from the store or you can use an already downloaded Shape from the library on your computer In order to access the Shapes store you must have already entered the Shapes server settings and your Shapes account information in the Shapes Preferences dialog in Preferences gt Esko gt Shapes Preferences Server Address shapes esko com User Name cla Password ssassaas Cancel OK Opening and placing a file from Shapes follows the same general workflow This example will show you how to place a Shapes file 1 In an open Illustrator document click File gt Structural Design gt Place from Shapes The Shapes window appears in the state you last used it either at your local computer s Shapes Library or at the online Shapes Store 32 3 DeskPack Advanced S dore Gd Sh Logged in cl m Q sns h EM A Purchase Histo apes sy Ww P n Results Plastic Containers 10 shapes per page g Search Shapes Sort by author Thumbnails 9 2D 3D Pages lt lt lof2 gt gt gt m Sgen EA Todes f z AV Margarine Tub 500g PET Bottle 1 liter PET Bottle 2 liter EskoArtwork D Esl k EskoArtwork D 4 2 If you want to use a new Shape choose it and buy it It gets downloaded to your local machine s Shapes Library Logged in cla ES
215. ng cutout windows to a loaded ArtiosCAD file 3 LDeskPack Advanced 3 5 2 Structural Design Import General Principles The Structural Design plug in enables you to open or place structural design files inside Adobe Illustrator The imported structural design files are linked to the Adobe lllustrator ai files but they are not embedded After opening or placing a structural design file the file appears in the Adobe Illustrator layer palette The structural design paths are special paths that cannot be modified accidentally By default the structural design layer and its sublayers will be locked You can unlock the structural design layers This enables you to select individual structural design paths and use the illustrator alignment tools to align graphics to the structural design paths Open or Place an ARD BAG DAE ZAE Tile From Suite 10 0 onwards when the plug in is present a dedicated Place File showing only Structural Design files is found in the File menu Choose File gt Structural Design gt Place File The appropriate file types also appear in the Illustrator Open and Place dialogs Open __ Structural Designs FAVORITES ix on hold F 6x Can 5 leeve zae E production Fy Can 300ml zae wr Structural Designs i Fj Can 500ml zae DEVICES c coffeepa 6pads bag Creamed ch M bag E Fj GAELICG 6pack ard Fj Mooh Milk box ard F Nose clip kraft ard waterbottle 1 5 L dae Enable Al
216. nscla c eO ten eaceny ae aneieda nee ae eaten 249 tse tO Dynamic Bacood Sron Rn ial erases atid gle d tete tieu emendi vau tll Nm A dredio n adus 251 11 5 WOKING WIT NOTES 251 RAE ilc Genes a a N N 253 UNE eredi NONG E coeurace EE 253 12 2 The Preflight Tor Illustrator GOHRGCODE ta si a ma al t ul v aiuti A t cu 254 12 2 1 What is Preflight for Illustrator 9 nnn nnne 254 12 2 2 ImporuExport of parameter Selsis eot bci opu HER E AM CoA PUN ERE 254 12 2 3 How Preflight for Illustrator WOFKS uasa tto net obo t orientem aot tts 254 a E S K O x DeskPack Advanced vi 13 n xb c ere eer eee 255 12 5 The VIO WY UI IM isseisoctetne uat rt ruat aUbtol Ete Ote oU Imt tote orta Meuse LUN US itstuk testor eta urbe p IR Osee tot 255 12 4 The Preflight for Illustrator Parameter Tabsheet ssssssssse emen 256 jo we 257 ur Erie teste 259 p oM n P 259 12 4 4 TSOPIE itemm eda UII PHI eV M MM ME md EM MEM UEMMNM 259 juriste E 261 1246 Parameter OBIUONS poni ee ee en frate dirai er ee UA Crab trn DTP 262 12 5 The Validator IaDSFPIBel ditaten oue eret in Rete ha qtasorie besttetba n boe rest ttai um rtu rele lta bos cosa rta Poids 263 12 5 1 Ihe Validator Options MF en iviutecaneprte dar t
217. nt thicker and not thinner bars Device Compensation Use this if your printer gave you a separate device bleed value This parameter adjusts the bar s width to compensate for bleed caused by the plate or film making process You can enter the Device Compensation in microns milliinches mil millimeters or inches Note If you use both a Bar Width Reduction and a Device Compensation value Dynamic Barcodes will add them to adjust the bar s width Tip You can enter a negative value if you want to print thicker and not thinner bars Magnification Use this parameter to increase or decrease the barcode size proportionally In the example below you can see the same barcode at 80 100 and 120 magnification uw MU amp 1 234567 Rg 1019 gt LI a s D DeskPack Advanced Size Choose to give your PZN barcode a Small Normal or Large size Those are predefined sizes for this barcode The actual Height Characters per unit Ratio and Narrow Bar values are shown underneath By selecting Custom you can manually edit these four parameters Height Enter the height to give to your barcode s bars They need to be tall enough to be read easily by barcode scanners Code 128 In Dynamic Barcodes you can create Code 128 barcodes shorter than the minimum height Dynamic Barcodes will just display a warning but if you export the document to EPF and open it in PackEdge PackEdge will extend
218. o eur esko com 2 What is a barcode A barcode is a machine readable representation of information in a visual format on a surface Barcodes can be read by optical scanners allowing quick and easy identification of all kind of goods Originally barcodes stored data in the widths and spacings of printed parallel lines but today they also come in patterns of dots concentric circles and hidden in images The information contained in a barcode varies from numbers to complete ASCII texts The drive to encode ever more information in combination with the space requirements of simple barcodes led to the development of matrix barcodes or 2D barcode which do not consist of bars but rather a grid of square cells Barcodes are just the visible part of often quite large systems frequently referred to as automated identification systems These systems are increasingly proving to be some of the most cost effective management tools since they enable organizations to keep track of their goods and stocks in all kinds of situations in a fast accurate and efficient way With the Dynamic Barcodes plug in you can add a dynamic barcode to your document without leaving your application Dynamic means that your barcode settings can be changed later on even after you saved closed and reopened your document 7 3 Getting Started with Dynamic Barcodes To introduce you to Dynamic Barcodes here is how to make your first barcode in four simple steps 1 Cre
219. o scan i El In the Dynamic Barcodes dialog click the Pre set barcodes icon L This opens the Select Barcode dialog DDeskPack Advanced Select Barcode Preview Barcode Type G51 128 GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional GS1 DataBar Stacked GS1 DataBar Stacked Omnidirectional GS1 DataBar Truncated GS1 DataBar Expanded GS1 DataBar Expanded Stacked GS1 DataBar Limited GS1 DataMatrix Code Preset 0000000000000 Hd Composite Component L Cancel J C OK Select your Barcode Type on the right to see a Preview of it on the left Note This shows previews of barcode placeholders Your actual barcode with data and specific parameters affecting its size may look slightly different For more information on barcode parameters see Barcode Types on page 133 If your barcode data can have several possible lengths for example EAN 13 can have 13 15 or 18 digits choose the length you want to preview in Code Preset Code Preset alale mE 000000000000000 Composite 900000000000000000 C If your barcode can have a Composite Component Some GS1 barcodes you can choose to preview it with or without that component Composite Component 1010 Click OK to use the preview parameters Barcode Type Code Preset and Composite Component as applicable in the Dynamic Barcodes dialog and close the Select Barcode dialog In the Dynamic Barcodes dialog click the Create button to create your barcode place
220. o software contains the RSA Data Security Inc MD5 Message Digest Algorithm Java and all Java based trademarks and logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems in the U S and other countries Part of this software uses technology by BestTM Color Technology EFI EFI and Bestcolor are registered trademarks of Electronics For Imaging GmbH in the U S Patent and Trademark Office Contains PowerNest library Copyrighted and Licensed by Alma 2005 2007 All other product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners Correspondence regarding this publication should be forwarded to Esko Software BVBA Kortrijksesteenweg 1095 B 9051 Gent info eur esko com introduction Instant Trapper is the new interactive trapping tool from EskoArtwork available as a plug in for Adobe Illustrator It allows pre press professionals to compensate for mis registration effects on graphical objects With Instant Trapper you can indicate adjoining colorpairs and create correctly shaped and colored trap objects in a very intuitive way You always stay in control of where and how trap objects are created Since Instant Trapper generates the trap objects in a separate layer trapping becomes a non destructive process Any trap object is fully editable and can be shown or hidden for various proofing purposes 10 3 Getting Started with Instant Trapper 220 To introduce you to Instant Trapper here is how
221. o to an Outside Bleed Layer e Outside Coating lines will go to an Outside Coating Layer e Dimensions and text will go to a Dimension Layer e All other linetypes will go to an Annotation Layer For convenience a swatch library ArtiosCAD Line Types is included with the plug in You can display the swatch library by selecting Window gt Swatch Libraries gt ArtiosCAD Line Types In this swatch library all ArtiosCAD design line types have been predefined Include a copy of ARD You can choose to include a copy of the ARD file that was loaded in the Illustrator document The resulting ARD file will contain the selected objects AND what is in the CAD layers in Illustrator Remove lines It is possible to remove some lines of the original ArtiosCAD file This is meant to modify cutout windows Do not attempt to remove fold lines with this tool If you do this the original fold angles will be lost 43 3 ESKO NEM 44 Place this ArtiosCAD file in the document If you switch this option on the resulting ARD file will be placed in the Illustrator document It will replace the structural design file that was loaded originally Preview In the preview window you see a preview of what will be saved You can highlight the selected contours by toggling on Highlight Selection You then see the distinction between the contours that are newly added to the resulting ARD file and those contours that come from the original ARD file
222. ob Sub Type The size of the symbol for Datamatrix barcodes Symbol Type on page 179 Code The encoded value including check digits Code on page 170 Composite Code For barcodes with a Composite Component Composite Component mainly GS1 Databar codes on page 171 Output Resolution Snap Bars to Output Resolution on page 178 Bar Width Reduction Bar Width Reduction on ee ec Device Compensation age Main size parameter for Code128 Int2of5 and Narrow Bar on page GS1 Databar barcodes 177 Device Compensation proportional size parameter for EAN and Magnification on page row nif UPC based barcodes 174 Ratio Used for Int20f5 barcodes Ratio on page 177 Important Automation Engine does not check the parameters All listed parameters are available for all barcode types even if they are not valid for the given barcode type Make sure you re entering the valid inputs including a correct Code with its check digit DeskPack Advanced Note It is not necessary to have the parameters already set on the Job Setup when creating barcodes as soon as the Job Setup contains the settings for connected barcodes these barcode parameters will be applied This allows you to create templates or placeholders before the actual data code for the barcode etc is available 7 8 1 Connecting to a Job Folder In order to take parameters from an Automation Engine Job Folder you need to be connected to an Automation Engine and ope
223. ockWise e 90 CCW Counter ClockWise e 180 4 LDeskPack Advanced Note In some cases rotating the complete document is not supported For example Dynamic Marks Drop Shadows Adobe Illustrator effects etc are not supported If this occurs a message will be shown 91 ESKO scooters o Channel Mapping 5 1 Copyright Notice 92 Copyright 2015 Esko Software BVBA Gent Belgium All rights reserved This material information and instructions for use contained herein are the property of Esko Software BVBA The material information and instructions are provided on an AS IS basis without warranty of any kind There are no warranties granted or extended by this document Furthermore Esko Software BVBA does not warrant guarantee or make any representations regarding the use or the results of the use of the software or the information contained herein Esko Software BVBA shall not be liable for any direct indirect consequential or incidental damages arising out of the use or inability to use the software or the information contained herein The information contained herein is subject to change without notice Revisions may be issued from time to time to advise of such changes and or additions No part of this document may be reproduced stored in a data base or retrieval system or published in any form or in any way electronically mechanically by print photoprint microfilm or any other means without prior written
224. ocument supersedes all previous dated versions PANTONE PantoneLIVE and other Pantone trademarks are the property of Pantone LLC All other trademarks or registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners Pantone is a wholly owned subsidiary of X Rite Incorporated 9 Pantone LLC 2015 All rights reserved This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group Portions of this software are copyright 9 1996 2002 The FreeType Project www freetype org All rights reserved Portions of this software are copyright 2006 Feeling Software copyright 2005 2006 Autodesk Media Entertainment Portions of this software are copyright 91998 2003 Daniel Veillard All rights reserved Portions of this software are copyright 91999 2006 The Botan Project All rights reserved Part of the software embedded in this product is gSOAP software Portions created by gSOAP are Copyright 92001 2004 Robert A van Engelen Genivia inc All rights reserved Portions of this software are copyright 91998 2008 The OpenSSL Project and 1995 1998 Eric Young eayQcryptsoft com All rights reserved This product includes software developed by the Apache Software Foundation http www apache org Adobe the Adobe logo Acrobat the Acrobat logo Adobe Creative Suite Illustrator InDesign PDF Photoshop PostScript XMP and the Powered by XMP logo are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the
225. ocuments by deselecting the option This allows you to align the crosshair in one document and align objects to these settings in another document To set boostX Crosshair Preferences Choose Edit gt Preferences gt Esko gt boostX Preferences PC or Illustrator gt Preferences gt Esko gt boostX Preferences MAC The boostX Preferences Dialog appears Select the desired setting for Crosshair Angle Position and save the settings boostX Preferences Crosshair Angle Position v Remember for each document Tool Layout fe Integrated Group Single Menu Layout fa Integrated O Single Menu Group Cancel Note Never put graphics on the boostX cross hair layer All objects on the boostX layer will be ignored DeskPack Advanced 4 3 Ink Mix 4 3 1 Working with Document Inks The InkMix Palette is a combination of Plug in filters allowing you to develop and manage your own custom Ink Base Colors color swatch palette These user defined Base Inks become the basis for which a commercial printer sets his presses up for your particular print job It is recommended for you to work closely together with a commercial printer before your work is press ready ensuring the Base Inks are appropriate for the job InkMix allows you to assign more than one spot color to an object and to mix process colors and spot colors in the same object The Ink Mix Plug in helps answer some critical print production que
226. oduct Custom Field 2 Product Custom Field 3 Product Customer Description Product Customer ID Product Customer Name Product Description Product ID Product Name Product Part Custom Field 1 Product Part Custom Field 2 Product Part Custom Field 3 Product Part Datazone Product Part Name Product Part Status 20f5 Bobst CLF8 Codabar Code 39 Code 128 Code 39 Extended Data Matrix ECC 200 EAN 8 EAN 13 GS1 128 GS1 Databar Omnidirectional DeskPack Advanced ES e GS1 Databar Expanded e GS1 Databar Expanded Stacked e GS1 Databar Limited e GS1 Databar Stacked e GS1 Databar Stacked Omnidirectional e GS1 Databar Truncated e GS1 Datamatrix e GS1 US Coupon Interim e HIBC 39 e HIBC 128 e TF 14 e TF 16 e nt 2of5 e Kurandt e Laetus Pharma e MS7 e MSI e Marks and Spencer e NDC HHI e PDF417 e MicroPDF417 e Plessey e PZN e PZN8 e Paraf Italy e QR e MicroQR e UPC A e UPC E e UPC SCS Formatting Dynamic Fields You can format certain fields so they look a certain way for example have the date in European or American format You can use predefined formats or create custom formats You can also choose to use a different format for each field or the same format for all fields Using an Existing Format e You can choose an existing format to apply to your field in the Format list For example use name ext to display the file name and extension when using the File Name field 207
227. of SolidWorks Corporation ESKO NEM Portions of this software are owned by Spatial Corp 1986 2003 All Rights Reserved JDF and the JDF logo are trademarks of the CIP4 Organisation Copyright 2001 The International Cooperation for the Integration of Processes in Prepress Press and Postpress CIP4 All rights reserved The Esko software contains the RSA Data Security Inc MD5 Message Digest Algorithm Java and all Java based trademarks and logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems in the U S and other countries Part of this software uses technology by BestTM Color Technology EFI EFI and Bestcolor are registered trademarks of Electronics For Imaging GmbH in the U S Patent and Trademark Office Contains PowerNest library Copyrighted and Licensed by Alma 2005 2007 All other product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners Correspondence regarding this publication should be forwarded to Esko Software BVBA Kortrijksesteenweg 1095 B 9051 Gent info eur esko com 3 2 Introduction to Data Exchange The Esko Data Exchange plug in for Adobe Illustrator combines several plug ins into one package for easier installation The combined plug ins are e he PDF Export Plug In on page 13 e he Structural Design Plug in on page 28 e The Ink Manager Plug in on page 21 e he Page Box Plug in on page 55 e Messages on page 63 e he WebCenter Connector Plug In Along
228. ok fuzzy In print Following parameters can be set regarding Fonts Minimum size for Single Ink text will report a problem if single ink text is found that has a smaller font size than the specified value where single ink means that the color of the text only contains one ink component Minimum size for Negative text will report a problem if negative text is found that has a smaller font size than the specified value negative is defined later in this document Minimum size for Multi Ink text will report a problem if negative text is found that has a smaller font size than the specified value where multi ink means that the color of the text contains more than one ink component By default the same settings apply for all types of fonts However separate settings can be entered for Serif fonts and Bold fonts Serif fonts have a short decorative line at the start or finish of a stroke in a letter and are therefore more difficult to print G The following logic applies when checking fonts e if afont is both Serif and Bold If Check on Serif Fonts is enabled the Serif parameter setting is applied If Check on Bold Fonts is enabled the Bold parameter setting is applied If both items are checked the highest value will apply See examples For Bold fonts If Check on Bold Fonts is enabled the Bold parameter is applied Otherwise the standard settings are applied e For Serif fonts If Check on Seri
229. olor Mode gt m EskoArtwork XMP File Info X 1 861 Print AF Select the contours to export to the ARD file and choose File gt Structural Design gt Export Selected Objects to ArtiosCAD File The Export Selected Objects to ArtiosCAD File dialog opens 42 DDeskPack Advanced Export Selected Objects to ArtiosCAD File Preview ArtiosCAD File Save selected objects in C Main Design Layer Q Annotation layers based on Adobe Illustrator layers Layers based on ArtiosCad Line Type swatches Iv Include a copy of Nose Clip box 125 kraft ARD Board information and graphics layers are not copied Rebuilding the design will mot be possible cca nn Remove Lines Place this ArtiosCAD file in the document The current ArtiosC AD file will be replaced by this saved file Mi Highlight Selection Cancel Save As Save selected objects in You can choose to save the selected objects in the Main Design Layer or in Annotation Layers If you save them in Annotation Layers an ARD file will be created with annotation layers with the same name as the illustrator layers Next to this you can choose Layers based on ArtiosCAD Line Type swatches If the selected objects are stroked with a swatch color with an ArtiosCAD line type name e g cut crease bleed then this option will create layers depending on the stroke color name e Cut and crease lines will go to a Main Layer e Outside Bleed lines will g
230. olor Picker 18 4 DDeskPack Advanced StrokeColor is Select an object based on the color used for its stroke By clicking once the color patch will take the color of the object currently selected or when no selection is made it takes the Illustrator current style When multiple different objects are selected and you click once the default color black is chosen Double clicking the patch will open the Illustrator Color Picker Tip Change your current style for fill or stroke to None see Tools palette or Appearance and select all objects with no fill or no stroke Fill Contains Ink Select an object based on the ink used for its fill This can be a process color ink or a spot color ink e Use the Lower than and Higher than options to only select the objects with certain percentages of the ink e Select the No other inks present check box if you only want to select objects with a fill in the selected ink but without other additional inks Stroke Contains Ink Select an object based on the ink used for its stroke This can be a process color ink or a spot color ink e Use the Lower than and Higher than options to only select the objects with certain percentages of the ink e Select No other inks present check box if you only want to select objects with a stroke in the selected ink but without other additional inks White Select any object with a white fill or stroke 4 2 3 Collection A Collection is a temporary
231. on yards Variable Measure Trade Item Width diameter or second dimension inches Variable Measure Trade Item Width diameter or second dimension feet Variable Measure Trade Item Width diameter or second dimension yards Variable Measure Trade Item Depth thickness height or third dimension inches Variable Measure Trade Item Depth thickness height or third dimension feet Variable Measure Trade Item Depth thickness height or third dimension yards Variable Measure Trade Item Logistic weight kilograms Length or first dimension metres Width diameter or second dimension metres Depth thickness height or third dimension metres Area square metres Logistic volume litres Logistic volume cubic metres Kilograms per square metre Logistic weight pounds Length or first dimension inches Length or first dimension feet Length or first dimension yards Width diameter or second dimension inches Width diameter or second dimension feet Width diameter or second dimension yard Depth thickness height or third dimension inches Depth thickness height or third dimension feet Depth thickness height or third dimension yards Area square inches Variable Measure Trade Item Area square feet Variable Measure Trade Item Area square yards Variable Measure Trade Item N4 N6 N4 N6 N4 N6 N4 N6 N4 N6 N4 N6 N4 N6 N4 N6 N4 N6 N4 N6 N4 N6
232. on of the Interleaved 2 of 5 barcode containing 16 digits the last being a check digit Q00000D0000000000 s Parameters General Parameters e Rotation on page 170 e Code on page 170 Text Parameters e Add Human Readable Characters on page 171 e Font Family Style and Size on page 172 e Vertical Offset on page 173 Additional Parameters e Text Format on page 174 e Bar Width Reduction on page 174 e Device Compensation on page 174 e Magnification on page 174 e Height on page 175 e Snap Bars to Output Resolution on page 178 e Total Height on page 180 e Smax Smin on page 180 e Box on page 181 Interleaved 2 of 5 About this Barcode DeskPack Advanced Interleaved 2 of 5 or Int 2 of 5 is a barcode originally used for transportation packaging that can have any even number of digits Since this type of packaging consists mainly of cardboard boxes printed in low quality the Interleaved 2 of 5 barcode is more tolerant to distortion than other barcodes oS e ca Parameters General Parameters e Rotation on page 170 e Code on page 170 153 ESKO NEM Text Parameters e Add Human Readable Characters on page 171 e Font Family Style and Size on page 172 e Alignment on page 173 e Vertical Offset on page 173 Additional Parameters e Bar Width Reduction on page 174 e Device Compensation on page 174 e Height on page 175 e Characters per unit on page 175 e Ratio on
233. operties on page 190 Note If you select multiple objects these objects will be grouped and added as one single mark in your set Note You can not create a Mark from any linked image 6 4 Dynamic Mark Properties You can open the Dynamic Mark Properties by choosing Window gt Esko gt Dynamic Marks gt Dynamic Mark Properties or by choosing Open Properties Palette from the flyout menu of the Dynamic Marks palette LI DYNAMIC MARK PROPERTIES Position i E Attach ta Trim Box l 16 409 mm H AE 14 261 mm Color Dynamic B 8 4 1 Position The position of a Mark is based on 3 settings Attach to The position of the Mark can be based on e Any page box Media Box Crop Box Bleed Box Trim Box or Art Box 190 DeskPack Advanced ES Note e a Page Box that is not defined in the file will be greyed out e f you load a Marks set that uses a page box not defined in the current file the Trim Box is used instead and a warning is shown e You can t delete a Page Box if there s a mark attached to it e another Dynamic Mark e a PowerLayout Repetition such as PowerLayout Grid 1 e Named Art Named Art is any art in your Illustrator document that you gave a name in the Layers palette browse to the object you want to name in the Layers palette double click the default name eg lt path gt and enter a name When selecting Nam
234. opyright 2005 2006 Autodesk Media Entertainment Portions of this software are copyright 91998 2003 Daniel Veillard All rights reserved Portions of this software are copyright 91999 2006 The Botan Project All rights reserved Part of the software embedded in this product is gSOAP software Portions created by gSOAP are Copyright 92001 2004 Robert A van Engelen Genivia inc All rights reserved Portions of this software are copyright 91998 2008 The OpenSSL Project and 1995 1998 Eric Young eayQcryptsoft com All rights reserved This product includes software developed by the Apache Software Foundation http www apache org Adobe the Adobe logo Acrobat the Acrobat logo Adobe Creative Suite Illustrator InDesign PDF Photoshop PostScript XMP and the Powered by XMP logo are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and or other countries Microsoft and the Microsoft logo are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries SolidWorks is a registered trademark of SolidWorks Corporation 22 10 S K Q X DeskPack Advanced 10 2 Portions of this software are owned by Spatial Corp 1986 2003 All Rights Reserved JDF and the JDF logo are trademarks of the CIP4 Organisation Copyright 2001 The International Cooperation for the Integration of Processes in Prepress Press and Postpress CIP4 All rights reserved The Esk
235. or Place an ARD file that already contains a cut out window If you also have Studio Designer you will see a 3D view of your folded box in the Studio window 49 DeskPack Advanced STUDIO Orientation tal 3 2 Create and select the new cutout shape that you want to add to the ARD file 3 Choose File gt Structural Design gt Export Selected Objects to ArtiosCAD File The Export Selected Objects to ArtiosCAD File appears SO DDeskPack Advanced Export Selected Objects to ArtiosCAD File Preview r ArtiosCAD File Save selected objects in Main Design Layer 3 Annotation layers based on Adobe Illustrator layers Q Layers based on ArtiosCad Line Type swatches Ivi Include a copy of carrier cutout ard Board information and graphics layers are nat copied Rebuilding the design will mot be possible Remove Lines Ivi Place this ArtiosCAD file in the document The current ArtiosCAD file will be replaced by this saved file Iv Highlight Selection Cancel Save As In the preview window you notice that you do not get the desired result We need to remove the original cutout window 4 Click Remove Lines The Remove Lines dialog appears 51 3 ESKO NEM 52 Export Selected Objects to ArtiosCAD File Click a line to remove or restore it Press spacebar 3 amp and click ta zoom in Press spacebar X and click to zoom out Press spacebar and drag to pan
236. or maximum 4 inks in the document units mm e 12 Gallus elements on left and right side of the document Mark Set 4 Esko A set for maximum 6 inks in the document units mm e Bearer Bars in vertical orientation and attached to the Trim Box e 6 Text Marks one per ink with the name of the ink placed inside the Bearer Bar and colored with 0 296 tint to knock out the Bearer Bar in the same separation 219 DeskPack Advanced ES Mark Set 5 Esko A set for maximum 12 inks in the document units mm e Bearer Bars in vertical orientation and attached to the Trim Box e a Gradation Strip on the left with one circle per ink colored in 100 e a Gradation Strip on the right with one circle per ink colored in 50 e Registration Marks placed on the left and right side e 12 Gallus elements on left and right side of the document e a Text Mark with the name of the document colored in registration e a Custom Mark setting a background for the above mentioned Text Mark e 12 Text Marks one per ink with the name of the ink and colored in 100 of the ink e a Custom Mark setting a background for the above mentioned Text Marks e 12 Text Marks one per ink with the current Angle of the ink and colored in 100 of the ink e 12 Text Marks one per ink with the current Ruling of the ink and colored in 100 of the ink e a lext Mark with the date and time e a Text Mark with the name of the author based on the XMP info 6 6 Dynamic Marks
237. ork ee Fit Media Box to Selection 5 LE d Fit Media Box to Bleed CAD ion 0 mm Right 0 mm Fit Media Box to Al Bleed Box 6 pir O 2a LH I Fit Artboard to Trim Box T Fit Artboard to Media Box 7 Leone 0 T ipt Mn wx i T v Use Transform Bounds V Show Trim Box and Media Box Move Trim Box and Media Box 9 E See more Page Boxes Delete Trim Box and Media Box 1 Trim Box Size Select the size from the dropdown list 2 Trim Box Width Length Enter the Width Length if you want a custom size OO ESKO NEM o6 Tip The units are defined in the Illustrator preferences 3 Trim Box Orientation Select the orientation portrait landscape Note When the Trim Box is being dragged or Width or Height editboxes edited the radio buttons Portrait Landscape flip automatically so that Landscape is active whenever Width Height and Portrait whenever Width Height 4 Fit Trim Box to 1 Fit Irim Box to Artboard Fit Irim Box to Artwork Fit Trim Box to Selection Fit Trim Box to CAD 5 Media Box Margins enter the top bottom left and right values Tip The units are defined in the Illustrator preferences 6 Fit Media Box to 1 Fit Media Box to Artboard H Fit Media Box to Artwork Fit Media Box to Selection Fit Media Box to Bleed CAD when no bleed was defined the cad will be taken as reference 7 Fit Artboard to e Fit Artboard to Trim Box e Fit Artboard to Media Box 8 Show Trim Box and Media Box
238. orporation DeskPack Advanced Portions of this software are owned by Spatial Corp 1986 2003 All Rights Reserved JDF and the JDF logo are trademarks of the CIP4 Organisation Copyright 2001 The International Cooperation for the Integration of Processes in Prepress Press and Postpress CIP4 All rights reserved The Esko software contains the RSA Data Security Inc MD5 Message Digest Algorithm Java and all Java based trademarks and logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems in the U S and other countries Part of this software uses technology by BestTM Color Technology EFI EFI and Bestcolor are registered trademarks of Electronics For Imaging GmbH in the U S Patent and Trademark Office Contains PowerNest library Copyrighted and Licensed by Alma 2005 2007 All other product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners Correspondence regarding this publication should be forwarded to Esko Software BVBA Kortrijksesteenweg 1095 B 9051 Gent info eur esko com 15 2 White Underprint White Underprint allows you to create a white background underneath the selected objects This white background can be necessary when printing on transparent or metal material The White Underprint plug in can generate white underprint objects for all kinds of Illustrator objects To open the White Underprint palette click Window gt Esko gt White Underprint The White Underprint palet
239. ors Convert Blended Objects to Images will convert blended objects to images You can set the resolution for this images to High 600dpi Medium 300dpi or Low 150dpi DeskPack Advanced Note In case of converting blended objects with different oveprint setting one is overprinting the other is not the convertion might change the final result The following message is shown Rasterized Blend combines art in overprint and not in overprint mode Rasterization may have caused changed appearance 3 3 3 Linked ArtiosCAD Graphics When you export a document with linked ArtiosCAD graphics to Normalized PDF the graphics are treated slightly differently When choosing Embed Images in the Preferences e The ArtiosCAD graphics are embedded in your Normalized PDF e The original link information is saved in your Normalized PDF When choosing Save Links in the Preferences e The ArtiosCAD graphics are embedded in your Normalized PDF e They are also copied to the location you define Next To Output File or on another server according to a Server Mapping if defined e The link to the copied graphics is saved in your Normalized PDF 3 4 The Ink Manager Plug in 3 4 1 Using the Ink Manager palette The Ink Manager palette is a powerful pre press color editing and proofing tool Easily identify where Pantone colors are used within a document or where custom spot colors can be found then convert these colors to a custom spot co
240. osCAD If the selected contour is in the Main Design layer the pointage of the contour will be 2 In all other cases the pointage will be O 45 ESKO EM Helationship between stroke color in Illustrator and line type in ArtiosCAD If the contours are stroked with a swatch color with an ArtiosCAD line type name e g cut crease then the corresponding items in ArtiosCAD will have the corresponding line type For example if you give your contour a stroke color with as name Annotation the contour will be in line type Annotation in ArtiosCAD If the name is not an ArtiosCAD line type name the contour will be a cut line For convenience a swatch library ArtiosCAD Line Types is included with the plug in You can display the swatch library by selecting Window gt Swatch Libraries gt ArtiosCAD Line Types In this swatch library all ArtiosCAD design line types have been predefined How to add a cutout window to an existing ArtiosCAD file 1 Open or place an ARD file If you also have Studio Designer you will see a 3D view of your folded box in the Studio window Orientation 2 Create and select the cutout shape that you want to add to the ArtiosCAD file 46 3 DDeskPack Advanced 150 cy Outside Bleed Dimensions E Overall dimensions b Main Design 3 Choose File gt Structural Design gt Export Selected Objects to ArtiosCAD File The Export Selected Objects to ArtiosCAD File appears
241. ounding box You can also choose to see the position of the bounding box around the bleed contour By entering a new value in the X and Y entry fields you move the selected point to the new position It is possible to flip the structural design so that you can add graphics to the back of the structural design This feature is only enabled for ArtiosCAD files The lower part of the palette shows the width and height of the Structure and Bleed bounding boxes Bleed Offsetindicates the offset between the structure and the bleed contour The bottom part provides information whether or not fold angles and animation were defined in the structural design Click one of the Rotation icons to rotate the structural design contours Rotation always happens around the center of the structure contour DDeskPack Advanced Create Varnish Plate Choose Window gt Esko gt Structural Design gt Create Varnish Plate Create Varnish Plate Use Bleed Outline Use Artboard Q Use Bounding Box of Structure Offset O pt e f you choose Use Bleed Outline then the contour will be created from the bleed outline minus the coating free areas if any e f you choose Use Artboard then the contour will be created from the Artboard minus the coating free areas e f you choose Use Bounding Box of Structure then the contour will be created from the Bounding Box of the structure minus the coating free areas When choosing Use Artboar
242. out brackets using FNC1 code at the end of each variable length element in the data While entering GS1 data following remarks should be taken into account e Do not add the mandatory FNC1 character at the beginning of the data Dynamic Barcodes will add it automatically e For GS1 bar codes intended for encoding Al 01 only Al has to be omitted i e don t enter 01 at the beginning It doesn t matter if entered with or without brackets e The Composite Component can be created using the same rules for using brackets and F1 It s not necessary to keep the same way of entering the Composite Component and the main code DDeskPack Advanced e f you don t use brackets for entering Al type F1 at the end of each variable length element in the data to represent a FNC1 terminating character except when the variable length element is placed at the end of the whole code e You don t need to type F1 at the end of fixed length elements Do not mix using F1 as terminators of variable Al and entering brackets around the Al Using brackets Al Al Al 01 12345678901231 30 19 21 123456789012 Fixed Variable Using F1 length length 01123456789012313019 F1 21123456789012 Al Dynamic Barcodes also checks the validity of the Application Identifiers you enter in the Code and or in the Composite Component of GS1 bar codes Composite Component A Composite Component is a 2D symbol placed on top of a GS1 barcode that encodes extra in
243. p your ink to this new ink in the Channel Mapping palette as described in Remapping an Ink on page 96 6 Delete the object you created in the new swatch in step 3 if necessary and save your document again 5 5 3 Removing an Ink from an Image 98 1 Select your image 2 In the Channel Mapping palette click on the ink you want to remove in the Map to column and select None in the drop down list 5 DeskPack Advanced Channel Mapping x I X Name O Overprint ma Mat Tm Process Cyan Process Cyan 100 p Process Magenta Process Cyan iD ix Process Yellow PANTONE 187C Process Black PANTONE 477 C id ES Mask 3 Click Apply 5 6 Remapping Inks in Several Images You can use Channel Mapping to remap inks in several images at once if those images e are all embedded or all linked e are either not mapped or all mapped the same way with the same source channels and the same target channels e all have the same Overprint state either overprinting or not overprinting 1 Select the images you want to map either using Illustrator s Selection tool or from the Layers or the Links palette The Channel Mapping palette displays the inks as it normally would for one image and the names of the selected images Channel Mapping x Mame buddha and light tif rase tif H Overprint ms Mat Tw Process Cyan Process Cyan 100 Pro
244. page 170 e Code on page 170 Text Parameters e Add Human Readable Characters on page 171 e Font Family Style and Size on page 172 e Vertical Offset on page 173 Additional Parameters e Bar Width Reduction on page 174 e Device Compensation on page 174 e Magnification on page 174 e Height on page 175 e Snap Bars to Output Resolution on page 178 e Box on page 181 NDC HRI About this Barcode The NDC HRI barcode is a variant of the UPC barcode with special human readable interpretation formats compliant to the US National Drug Code definition 15f 158 DeskPack Advanced LU 3 0000 0000 00 41 Parameters General Parameters Rotation on page 170 Code on page 170 Text Parameters e Add Human Readable Characters on page 171 Font Family Style and Size on page 172 Vertical Offset on page 173 Additional Parameters Text Format on page 174 Bar Width Reduction on page 174 Device Compensation on page 174 Magnification on page 174 Height on page 175 Snap Bars to Output Resolution on page 178 Box on page 181 Paraf Italy About this Barcode This barcode is a variant of Code 39 used by the Italian Health and Cosmetics Industry It is also called Code 32 DeskPack Advanced Use Code Base32 when your barcode data is encoded in the Base 32 format This format uses case insensitive alohanumeric characters to encode data Use Code Base10when your barcode data is in decimal for
245. path for the rest of missing images Apply to all missing images Cancel ek There are 3 options e Leave Unresolved Only a single pixel placeholder is embedded The link to the original file is lost The Links palette can be used to relink to the original file when it becomes available or to any other file 250 DeskPack Advanced e Use Embedded The image preview embedded in the PDF is used Normalized PDF often contains a preview with a low resolution up to 72 dpi However often there is just a single pixel placeholder The link to the original file is lost The Links palette can be used to relink to the original file when it becomes available or to any other file e Relink the standard file dialog opens asking the user to find the missing linked file When this option is selected the Use path for the rest of missing images option becomes enabled 11 4 10 Dynamic Barcodes Barcodes in Normalised PDF created by PackEdge or an Automation Engine server task are preserved and recognised as barcode objects If the Dynamic Barcode plug in is installed and licensed it allows user to modify parameters of the barcodes supported by the Dynamic Barcode plugin 11 5 VVorking with Notes Using the Notes tool you can add and edit notes in your document E z Ed Evedropper Tool I B iol Measure Tool i Inspection Setup Notes Ch o Importing and saving notes Notes are saved in the Nor
246. pe e General Attributes e Fill and Stroke e Appearance e Color It s good to know that Select By Attributes works differently when combining selections within the same selection group or when combining selection criteria in different selection groups 19 4 ESKO NEM 16 When adding selection criteria in the same selection group Select by Attributes will simply add the search criteria e g searching in Object Type for a Path Text and a Mesh will result in a selection of all paths all text and all mesh objects However when combining selections in different selection groups Select by Attributes will combine the selection criteria e g searching for Text in Object Type and Stroke in Fill and Stroke will only select text objects colored with a stroke Note Click on a triangle to collapse or expand the section Alt click on an expanded section to open all the sections Alt click on a collapsed section to expand that secttion and collapse all others Object Type The Object Type group has ten options SELECT BY ATTRIBUTES gt Object Type Mash Path Any Se Text All HH Oot Symbol Dynamic Barcode Dynamic Table Linked File All Dynamic Object oe o Image Any Image Thin Part Fix General Attributes Fill and Stroke Appearance Color Deselect Refine Collect T E Lu EM d Path Select objects based on the pat
247. permission from Esko Software BVBA This document supersedes all previous dated versions PANTONE PantoneLIVE and other Pantone trademarks are the property of Pantone LLC All other trademarks or registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners Pantone is a wholly owned subsidiary of X Rite Incorporated 9 Pantone LLC 2015 All rights reserved This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group Portions of this software are copyright 9 1996 2002 The FreeType Project www freetype org All rights reserved Portions of this software are copyright 2006 Feeling Software copyright 2005 2006 Autodesk Media Entertainment Portions of this software are copyright 91998 2003 Daniel Veillard All rights reserved Portions of this software are copyright 91999 2006 The Botan Project All rights reserved Part of the software embedded in this product is gSOAP software Portions created by gSOAP are Copyright 92001 2004 Robert A van Engelen Genivia inc All rights reserved Portions of this software are copyright 91998 2008 The OpenSSL Project and 1995 1998 Eric Young eayQcryptsoft com All rights reserved This product includes software developed by the Apache Software Foundation http www apache org Adobe the Adobe logo Acrobat the Acrobat logo Adobe Creative Suite Illustrator InDesign PDF Photoshop PostScript XMP and the Powered by XMP logo are either registered trademarks or tr
248. preferences are set on pixels the Valdator will provide no information e g on minimum object size and such 12 5 1 The Validator Options Menu 264 Clicking the black triangle in the top right corner of the Validator tab sheet displays following options Show Hide Info This toggle adds or removes an extra info field at the bottom of the Validator window After checking your job selecting individual report lines then shows extra information like the parameters used for that particular report line If the button Show Parameter Values is disabled above the info field the text window will only show user defined info Import Parameter File imports a parameter file that was exported with Preflight for Illustrator The parameter file is saved automatically in a dedicated directory and added to the parameter file list in Preflight for Illustrator Ignore Invisible Layers This feature will prevent Preflight for Illustrator from analyzing invisible layers 12 LDeskPack Advanced hereby overruling the setting in the Preflight for Illustrator Parameters Other tab Auto Select First Violation If any this option automatically selects the first anomalies found after a check Zoom to Selection When activated the object which reports anomalities will be zoomed into and centered in the Document Window 12 6 Select by Attributes The Select by Attributes option opens the Select by Attributes palette from which you can define a custom selection fil
249. ps is selected an Ink added from an Ink book will be placed in a Group in the Illustrator Swatches The Group will have the same name as the Ink book 6 6 Pantone ink books As from DeskPack 10 1 you can use the Pantone ink books instead of the regular Pantone ink books You can do this by running the Pantone installer from the Extras folder on the DVD Note We advise to only use these ink books if you are familiar with Pantone 109 ESKO scooters f Dynamic Barcodes 7 1 Copyright Notice 110 Copyright 2015 Esko Software BVBA Gent Belgium All rights reserved This material information and instructions for use contained herein are the property of Esko Software BVBA The material information and instructions are provided on an AS IS basis without warranty of any kind There are no warranties granted or extended by this document Furthermore Esko Software BVBA does not warrant guarantee or make any representations regarding the use or the results of the use of the software or the information contained herein Esko Software BVBA shall not be liable for any direct indirect consequential or incidental damages arising out of the use or inability to use the software or the information contained herein The information contained herein is subject to change without notice Revisions may be issued from time to time to advise of such changes and or additions No part of this document may be reproduced stored in a data
250. ps on page 240 e To change the trapping direction from spread to choke hold Option while dragging the arrow Trapping Several Objects to One Object e To spread several objects to one object a drag a rectangle around the objects to spread b drag the arrow into the object to spread them into and click PTT This uses the same trapping direction for all objects in the rectangle you drag If you need to trap different objects in different directions you should use combined trapping see Trapping using Combined Traps on page 240 e To change the trapping direction from spread to choke hold Option while dragging the arrow 10 6 2 Using the Trap to All Tool e You can find the Trap to All tool in Illustrator s Tools panel 230 DeskPack Advanced Trapping an Object to All Adjoining Objects e To spread an object to the background and the foreground to all objects under it and on top of it click in it Zor 10 DeskPack Advanced e To choke it instead of spreading it hold Option while clicking in it e To spread an object to the background only to all objects under it hold Shift while clicking in it e To choke it with the background hold Option and Shift while clicking in it Note Instant Trapper treats an object and its stroke as two different objects Therefore it will not trap the fill object to the background as the stroke object is between the fill object and the background Trapp
251. r Registration H v Include Technical Inks s Bearer Bars Width E mm Offset fo mm Extend fo mmi 195 ES E S K O x DeskPack Advanced 196 Position Bearer Bars will be automatically attached to a currently selected PowerLayout Standalone grid or another selected Dynamic Mark If no grid or Dynamic Mark is selected the Bearer Bars are attached to the Trim Box If the Show on Both Sides option is selected you will get a Bearer Bar on both sides top and bottom or left and right By positioning the blue rectangles you can choose between a vertical or horizontal orientation Color Bearer Bars are by default in Registration color Width The width of the Bearer Bar Extend allows to extend the Bearer Bar on both size Entering e g 5mm will extend the Bearer Bar by 5 mm on both ends Offset defines the distance between the Attach to object and the Bearer Bars Gradation Strip Properties Gradation Strips are created from a symbol named GradationStrip and are by default 3 rectangles of 5 x 5mm horizontally colored 4096 8096 and 10096 one strip per ink K di DYNAMIC MARKS PROPERTIES Position L1 hmm t hmm o Gradation Strip Width One Strip per Ink Symbol f Set Symbol Flip Normal DB Position Gradation Strips will be automatically attached to a currently selected PowerLayout otandalone grid or another selected Dynamic Mark If no grid or Dynamic Mark
252. r on page 282 White Underprint on page 304 DeskPack Advanced o Data Exchange 3 1 Copyright Notice Copyright 2015 Esko Software BVBA Gent Belgium All rights reserved This material information and instructions for use contained herein are the property of Esko Software BVBA The material information and instructions are provided on an AS IS basis without warranty of any kind There are no warranties granted or extended by this document Furthermore Esko Software BVBA does not warrant guarantee or make any representations regarding the use or the results of the use of the software or the information contained herein Esko Software BVBA shall not be liable for any direct indirect consequential or incidental damages arising out of the use or inability to use the software or the information contained herein The information contained herein is subject to change without notice Revisions may be issued from time to time to advise of such changes and or additions No part of this document may be reproduced stored in a data base or retrieval system or published in any form or in any way electronically mechanically by print photoprint microfilm or any other means without prior written permission from Esko Software BVBA This document supersedes all previous dated versions PANTONE PantoneLIVE and other Pantone trademarks are the property of Pantone LLC All other trademarks or registered trademarks are the property of their
253. r pl Er bitte cerit E peg Dd etat editi brum Ut 264 12 5 SSlecE Dy AIDU S ctetuer E te ete eee UMEN CUM IM CR UIN ee eee 265 puce T 266 12 6 2 General ABHPIDULGS tito th tto mte PER inb eda edunt pd eod ub lenta us ons Euboea ee aut da 267 12 63 TA dre BO KG cuidar metuo sitara emm PU nouum mouere eu dini e mU iin uniti V m 267 12 6 4 2 9 912 2 G gt T T 267 pog COO ee 268 Uo CN GN OM m Q 269 t2 ga Modiymo a 6 of 0 g Renee erent ae nnn nn omm 270 1 MIPIR ene sme 271 128 1 PIG all PYF QUES issiimti ananena aeia kindani eaa i iai koniin 212 12592 osa Pans OO beget deere E m m 212 12 8 3 Thin Parts settings sse eene ener ener nnns 213 o NMS FONT cca hap see Racers eae ans ene areas ed tee acne ramen seated eaten Q 214 12 9 1 Why would you use font classification sssssssessse eee nenne 274 12 9 2 Parameter FONTS senrunpisienueni aia aiaia iii eiei 274 12 9 5 Font EISE ODUODS MEU E E E E 275 E e e ai E E A E E O E IE A E eee ee eee ee 217 eel 1 Y D o Pe ee nT Ee eR eT 278 aio ee aele i ei a m ean nee een ne te nent A E ene eee nee ae ene arene ee ee erty 2 8 13 2 Screening for Illustrator overview sse mener 2 8 13 3 Screening for Illustrator workflow sse nennen nennen nennen 2 8 13 4 Added features of the InkManager table sss eene nnns 280 l2 a C
254. radient or Pattern Opacity Select the objects that have a fill or a stroke with an opacity level or transparency lower than a certain percentage Blending Select objects that have a fill or a stroke set with one of the blending types for example darken or multiply Select a blending mode from the drop down list Overprint Select the objects set in overprint Opacity Mask Select any objects with an Opacity mask linked to it Opacity masks are used to alter the transparency of objects and can also be selected via the Opacity option Effects Select any object that has an Adobe lllustrator Effect applied to it Color The Color group has several options SELECT BY ATTRIBUTES Object Type General Attributes gt Fill and Stroke Appearance z7 Color 7 Fill Contains Ink Process Black be C Fit Color ts Any wj ox Stroke Color ls No Other Inks Present White Stroke Contains Ink Process Black H4 Any Dx No Other Inks Present Deselect Refine jf c Collect A n Fill Color is Select an object based on the color used for its fill By clicking once the color patch will take the color of the object currently selected or when no selection is made it takes the Illustrator current style When multiple different objects are selected and you click once the default color black is chosen Double clicking the patch will open the Illustrator C
255. rs eesca nts hatter PauU NIE eee 214 8 5 3 Delete Mark SOU TEE CO Lo UO ILLO 215 98 5 4 Manage Mark OBS etre ie E E RET e Pup Yet otra Lud och eU meanness 215 8 5 5 Export Mark Sets sse eem i rr aa n 216 8 5 6 Dynamic Marks Preferences sss eene eere enne 216 BS ESO NK 9e DS a E E equa nacido NU aed qe mINUMUVI UNUM edU dus 217 8 0 UMS Marks Layer Nm m 219 8 7 Dynamic Panels m Dynamic MAEKS scuoh atavet v Plin id Y NN SHCN E RE Eni ERUU FRENIS 219 o0 eee TO TO OE 220 Contents Image gt 411 2 64 0 geen enn ee rr TR DO TOTO Eee 222 RU HNN CLG EVO Vectra ae scala cat ee cag cece OO DOO 222 9 2 Supported embedded raster image types eee nennen nennen 222 9 3 Image Extractor for Illustrator workflow sse nennen ener 222 9 9 T Export Oh e Image cue ec torte be ted ute ts utin eb ul o tito teo en mer tert terme oer totes pae Lam 2293 9 3 2 Export of all images In the documenti ti en tet e tt Bb cl e EH dudar 224 94 Other Teat ureS M EITHER CENT NENRUEURUR 225 9 4 1 Placing embedding linking of Esko CT files sse e nnne 225 9 4 2 What Image Extractor for Illustrator does not support mme 225 TOLSTI NALIN tated tarts Eus tcI i abor abel edo acta ADU E cct A t cem c action eae 227 jo E Gro diea eer 227 TOZ MULE ORI LION eccentric 228 10 3 Getting Started with Instant Trapper sssssssssessee een mene nen nene 228 10 4 The Instant Trapper PIG IDs idi tod u
256. rved 11 4 3 Inks Esko screenings ink types ink books ink order and Printing Method as shown in the Ink Manager are preserved 11 4 4 Object based screening Object based Esko screening is preserved and shown in the InkManager The Screening plug in is not needed for this functionality 11 4 5 Structural Design CAD data The original structural design file is reimported using the Structural Design plug in that is part of Esko Data Exchange The original placement origin rotation angle front back side and printable part selection are preserved When the structural design file cannot be found the user is asked to browse for it When it still can t be found or importing fails the original Structural Design layer is imported in expanded state and the link to the external file is lost 11 4 6 Page boxes Media Box and Trim Box are imported and shown by the Trim Box and Media Box plug in 11 4 7 Text and fonts 249 When importing text only the PDF content is imported High level editor specific features such as styles are not in the PDF and thus not preserved Text paragraphs are not preserved and in general text lines are not preserved as well depending on the formatting It may happen that text is split into several text objects where each object has a constant font style In very rare circumstances when it is not possible to determine the encoding the text is contourized DeskPack Advanced Any font available to
257. s Interface To add an OPI mapping do the following 1 Click the plus sign to the lower left of the list pane This opens the OPI Rule Editor dialog 18 5 6 DeskPack Advanced OPI Rule Editor If All of the following conditions are met Full Path Is Hd lJobFiles Originals Images e X Apply the following changes e Replace Full Path B lJobFiles Fixed Images WS Cancel Cx After the word If decide how many conditions that must be true for this mapping rule to take effect All Any or None For the condition In the top pane of the dialog choose the element of the image file s path to examine in the first field Image paths are in URI Uniform Resource Identifier format such as file mymac MacHD images lowres tests Spacebar CMYK eps As you select elements further controls appear on the same line to refine the condition For example if you choose Full Path Is you can click to browse for a folder or click x to revert to the previous folder To add a condition click to remove a condition click Once you have defined the conditions define the changes to the path in the lower pane of the window Use the same process to define the changes as you did to define the conditions choose the change then set its options on the same line To add a change click to remove a change click Click OK to finish defining the rule To add another rule click to remo
258. s in the document can change the color of the mark Technical inks are not used in the mark Note If you manually change the color of a mark set to Darkest the color will change back to the darkest ink at the next mark update 193 ES E S K O x DeskPack Advanced Fill Stroke For custom marks and for Color Patch marks you can define both the Fill and the Stroke Color For Stroke you have an extra option Same as fill Defaults Every Dynamic Mark has a default color attribute Custom mark plain object all Dynamic Cut Mark Hegistration Darkest Static Darkest Text all Dynamic Image Mark Static Dynamic otatic Dynamic Objects Barcode all otatic Panel Table Bearer Bar all Registration Gradation Strip No Color Options not applicable Grid Marks Registration Darkest Static Registration Corner Marks Registration Darkest Static Registration Color Patch only applicable for stroke all same as fill A Custom mark created from a mesh or gradient object will always have color attribute Static This can t be changed An Image Mark will always be static except for monochromatic images which could be dynamic as well Note A Gradation Strip doesn t allow setting Color options A Gradation Strip always uses every ink except for technical inks Inks When using Dynamic color you can choose what inks to include All inks only technical inks or only printing inks For any other color option you can t c
259. se changing an ink comes too expensive This means that for example on a five color press only 1 spot color can be used on that press This is a traditional CMYK setup fora 4 tower press which only prints process inks If any spot colors are defined and used in the 20 1 2 S K O X DeskPack Advanced Maximum Number of Allowed Process 7 job Preflight for Illustrator will report this and Inks request to convert to CMYK Maximum Number of Allowed Spot Colors 0 Maximum Number of Allowed Inks 4 Always Include in Ink Count Process Cyan Process Magenta n Process Yellow Process Black In this setup the 4 process colors plus one ere Number of Allowed Process spot color may be used If more than one i spot color is used in the design Preflight for Maximum Number of Allowed Spot Colors D Illustrator will notify you Maximum Mumber af Allowed Inks sj Always Include in Ink Count Process Cyan Process Magenta P Process Yellow Process Black This is an example for a 5 tower press where 3 er Number of Allowed Process spot colors can be used If the design contains 2 process inks only and 3 spot colors there is a valid situation Other valid combinations are 3 Maximum Number of Allowed Inks 5 process 2 spot 4 process 1 spot Maximum Number of Allowed Spot Colors 3 Always Include in Ink Count Proce
260. selected ink but without other additional inks White Select any object with a white fill or stroke 12 Collection A Collection is a temporary set of objects based on a selection It allows to navigate through the objects in the Collection automatically zooming in on them A collection is temporary and only kept until it is cleared or until the document is closed 1 Select a number of objects You can select objects manually or by using e g Select by Attribute 2 Choose Window gt Esko gt Collection to open the Collection dialog E COLLECTION To make a collection select artwork and click the Make Collection button 3 Click the Make Collection button to make a collection based on the selection 269 1 2 S K O X DeskPack Advanced Note By clicking the Collect button in the Select by Attribute palette you can skip step 2 and 3 and immediately create a collection based on the properties set in the Select by Attribute palette See also Select by Attributes on page 75 4 Browse through the collection I4 4 275 s 285 Pi Info lt Compound Path gt MI Highlight W Zoom wl Select 1 Make New Collection The Collection dialog will show the number of objects in the Collection e Use the browse buttons to navigate through the different objects in the collection e The Info field shows the type of object currently selected e Select the Zoom option to automatically zoom in on the c
261. ses in Prepress Press and Postpress CIP4 All rights reserved DeskPack Advanced The Esko software contains the RSA Data Security Inc MD5 Message Digest Algorithm Java and all Java based trademarks and logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems in the U S and other countries Part of this software uses technology by BestTM Color Technology EFI EFI and Bestcolor are registered trademarks of Electronics For Imaging GmbH in the U S Patent and Trademark Office Contains PowerNest library Copyrighted and Licensed by Alma 2005 2007 All other product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners Correspondence regarding this publication should be forwarded to Esko Software BVBA Kortrijksesteenweg 1095 B 9051 Gent info eur esko com ESKO NEM 2 About DeskPack Advanced 1O The DeskPack Advanced for Illustrator bundle offers essential prepress functionality adding barcodes do preflighting remap image channels adding white underprint trap your files adding screening Everything needed to make packaging artwork ready to print It combines the following plug ins Data Exchange on page 11 Free boostX on page 68 Channel Mapping on page 92 Color Engine on page 104 Dynamic Barcodes on page 110 Dynamic Marks on page 186 Image Extractor on page 222 Instant Trapper on page 227 PDF Import on page 245 Preflight on page 253 Screening on page 278 Viewe
262. set of objects based on a selection It allows to navigate through the objects in the Collection automatically zooming in on them A collection is temporary and only kept until it is cleared or until the document is closed 1 Select a number of objects You can select objects manually or by using e g Select by Attribute 2 Choose Window Esko Collection to open the Collection dialog COLLECTION To make a collection select artwork and click the Make Collection buttan 3 Click the Make Collection button to make a collection based on the selection 19 ESKO NEM Note By clicking the Collect button in the Select by Attribute palette you can skip step 2 and 3 and immediately create a collection based on the properties set in the Select by Attribute palette oee also Select by Attributes on page 75 4 Browse through the collection i 4 275 s 285 Pi Info lt Compound Path gt MI Highlight W Zoom wl Select 1 Make New Collection The Collection dialog will show the number of objects in the Collection e Use the browse buttons to navigate through the different objects in the collection e The Info field shows the type of object currently selected e Select the Zoom option to automatically zoom in on the currently browsed object e Select the Select option to automatically select the currently browsed object Note Selecting or deselecting objects doesn t change the collection You can st
263. size parameters are now highlighted To use the Dust Direct Select toolThe Dust Direct Select tool allows you to marquee select objects or their compound paths to determine a selection Hold down the mouse button to show the Direct Selection options gt boostXDustDirectSelect Tool The Dust Direct Select tool is now the active tool of the Adobe Illustrator Tool Box LDeskPack Advanced Tip First draw your selection marquee and press CTRL holding the selection to delete everything in the selection To create a selection use your mouse to make a Marquee Selection box of a desired size The Dust Direct Select Tool will search the drawing to select objects paths of compound objects or paths of groups of the same size or smaller Selection tools under Select gt Esko Select Dust The Dust Select filter searches your document for objects of the same size by area calculation or smaller Ideal for scanned artwork clean up Inspect the drawing to determine the biggest object that should be removed select that object then enable the boostX Dust select filter All objects of the same size or smaller are selected Now you can decide to delete these objects or edit them To use Dust Select Select an object Choose Select gt Esko gt boostX Dust o 4 ESKO NEM 74 Select Effect View Window Help All HA All on Active Artboard WHA Deselect OWA opacity fioo0 bmx lial El cele 5 T bX Select Dust bX Sele
264. skPack Advanced It can be found on the Edit menu Object Type Select Filter Effect wie Undo Star Ctrl 2 Reda shifE4 CErl z Cut CErl X Copy Ctrl C Paste Ctrl V Paste in Front CErl F Paste in Back CErl B Clear Artios CAD Copy to Clipboard Find and Replace Find Mex Check Spelling CErl I Edit Custom Dictionary ArtiosCAD Copy to Clipboard copies the selected contours to the Windows Clipboard They can directly be pasted into ArtiosCAD If you have the same ArtiosCAD workspace open in ArtiosCAD and have not modified it since opening it in Illustrator when you paste the contents of the clipboard into ArtiosCAD they use the same placement as was used in Illustrator This function is useful for ArtiosCAD users who need shapes from the graphics to be added to the box design Copy to Clipboard also offers you the possibility to add the ARD file that is currently loaded in the Illustrator document Keep in mind that graphics layers are not copied The resulting ARD file is also not rebuildable and text will be contourized ArtiosL AD Copy to Clipboard Include a copy af Pasta ard Graphics layers are not copied Rebuilding the design will not be possible Cancel Note Placed EPS objects and or pixel based objects cannot be copied to an ARD file The fill color of the selected contours is not maintained in ArtiosCAD The stroke color of the contour determines the line type in Arti
265. software are copyright 91999 2006 The Botan Project All rights reserved Part of the software embedded in this product is gSOAP software Portions created by gSOAP are Copyright 92001 2004 Robert A van Engelen Genivia inc All rights reserved Portions of this software are copyright 91998 2008 The OpenSSL Project and 1995 1998 Eric Young eayQcryptsoft com All rights reserved This product includes software developed by the Apache Software Foundation http www apache org Adobe the Adobe logo Acrobat the Acrobat logo Adobe Creative Suite Illustrator InDesign PDF Photoshop PostScript XMP and the Powered by XMP logo are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and or other countries Microsoft and the Microsoft logo are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries SolidWorks is a registered trademark of SolidWorks Corporation 245 11 S K Q X DeskPack Advanced Portions of this software are owned by Spatial Corp 1986 2003 All Rights Reserved JDF and the JDF logo are trademarks of the CIP4 Organisation Copyright 2001 The International Cooperation for the Integration of Processes in Prepress Press and Postpress CIP4 All rights reserved The Esko software contains the RSA Data Security Inc MD5 Message Digest Algorithm Java and all Java based trademarks and logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of
266. ss Cyan Process Magenta _ Process Yellow Process Black In this example the C M and K ink should Mae mum Number of Allowed Process always be counted even if they are not used This means that if the job contains e g black cyan yellow and 2 spot colors an error will be Siac line Number DP Ald inks s reported although only five inks are used Maximum Number of Allowed Spot Colors 2 Always Include in Ink Count vi Process Cyan v Process Magenta Process Yellow vi Process Black 258 DeskPack Advanced SS 12 4 2 Image This tab allows you to define parameters regarding imported images Following parameters can be set e Check on EPSF images If any EPSF EPS images are referred to in the job Preflight for Illustrator will notify you e Check on TIFF images If any TIFF images are referred to in the job Preflight for Illustrator will notify you e Check on Other images this option will invoke notification if the design references external images which are not EPSF and or TIFF e Check on Embedded images this option signals if the design contains embedded images not linked e Check on RGB images this option signals whether the design uses RGB images of any type e List Resolution of Images when enabled the resolution of all images will be compared to the specified values A minimum and a maximum resolution setting is available for both Contone and
267. ssages e Create barcode placeholders with no data in them in your design See Creating a Barcode Placeholder Quickly on page 118 You can also use the regular Illustrator functions to e change the barcode s position in your document e rotate it by multiples of 90 degrees using Object gt Transform gt Rotate Tip You can rotate several barcodes at once e change its fill color it is not possible to apply a stroke Attention Choose a fill color that is e a process or a spot color other colors might generate trapping problems e nottoo light or the barcode might be difficult to scan e copy and paste it e delete it 1 9 Dynamic Barcodes Basics 113 ESKO NEM 7 5 1 Creating a Barcode 1 Create a CMYK Illustrator document and go to Windows Esko Dynamic Barcodes You can also use the Command Option 4 shortcut on Mac or the CTRL Alt 4 shortcut on PC This opens the Dynamic Barcodes dialog Dynamic Barcodes i ie m Code gt Text parameters gt Additional parameters Get Properties from Job Setup 2 Define the color of the barcode in your Illustrator color palette define a single color fill style and no stroke Dynamic Barcodes creates bars by generating rectangular objects and assigning the current fill style to them Color X Color Guide x b IEENESENIENI oy K m
268. stions e Which colors and special inks do you plan to specify so they can by applied correctly e Which colors within your document need special printing instructions e How many colors can be printed in one press run e Will your job run on a two color four color or six color press e What color separation instructions does your commercial printer need 4 3 2 Using the Ink Mix palette To use the Ink Mix palette Choose Window gt Esko gt boostX gt InkMix Bik thy 2 ET m A 4 Process Cyan F Process Magenta 5 Process Yellow Process Black amp PANTONE 1787 C gold foil block hot stamped PANTONE 872 C Fill or Stroke Add to Graphic Styles Fly out menu None button Ink slider amp percentage aghond 85 ESKO NEM S6 Changing the Ink Mix of an object When selecting an object the Ink Mix palette will show the actual Fill or Stroke color You can simply change the color by entering the percentages in the input fields or by dragging the sliders for each ink You can apply a Swatch color by dragging and dropping a color from the Swatches pallete onto the fill stroke icon You can erase all inks in the selected object s by clicking the None button 4 Note You can also mix the gradient color stops Simply select the object with the gradient and click on one of the color stops Ins in the Ink Mix palette The Ink Mix palette shows all inks currently used in the
269. strator This selection is used for Dynamic Mark palette operations zoom trash expand remove e fyouclick at the right side of the row or if you select the art using the Illustrator select tools the Mark is showing a colored rectangle indicating that the actual art is selected in Adobe Illustrator This selection is used for the Marks Properties 8 3 1 Adding a Standard Mark You can add one of the predefined Standard Marks to your Mark set h Click the Add Standard Mark button o or select Add Standard Mark from the fly out menu 2 Select the Standard Mark you want to add 3 Click Add The Standard Mark will be added to the Mark Set and in the current document You can change its properties in the Dynamic Marks Properties palette See Dynamic Mark Properties on page 190 The Standard Marks currently available are e Cut Mark e Bearer Bars e Gradation Strip e Grid Marks e Corner Marks e Color Patches For more information on the properties for the Standard Marks see Specific Mark Properties on page 194 189 ES E S KO x DeskPack Advanced 8 3 2 Adding objects as Mark You can add existing objects as a Mark to your set 1 Select the object you want to use as a mark e Click the Add Selected Art as Mark button Lt or select Add Selected Art as Mark from the fly out menu The new Mark will appear in the Dynamic Marks palette You can change its properties in the Dynamic Marks Properties palette See Dynamic Mark Pr
270. strator locates every problem object and allows you to edit Validation can be done interactively Another feature of Preflight for Illustrator lets you collect all items related to the job which makes it the ideal companion plug in if you regularly transfer files to printshops 12 2 2 Import Export of parameter sets A pre press shop could create some parameter sets which are distributed to all the design houses they work with These companies can check their designs with these parameter sets This will reduce costs at both sides the design houses deliver better artwork avoiding potential additional costs for fixing problems in the print shop and the print shop knows upfront if a job is good quality or not 12 2 3 How Preflight for Illustrator works Preflight for Illustrator compares the values of object attributes to the values stored in a Parameter Set This means that relations between objects are ignored The above has an impact on the Preflight 254 12 LDeskPack Advanced for Illustrator definition of NEGATIVE strokes A 3 cyan stroke with a 1 mm width on top of a dark background is regarded as negative while 2 dark rectangles with a 1 mm gap inbetween on a 3 cyan background do not trigger a negative situation Actually the program does not look at the background since only individual object attributes are regarded if a stroke has a color of which the sum of percentages of ink components is below the predef
271. t encodes the organization s primary and or secondary Labeler Identification Code LIC This encoding begins with the character If both primary and secondary Labeler Identification Codes are encoded in one barcode they are divided by the character TN ue Parameters General Parameters e Rotation on page 170 e Code on page 170 Text Parameters e Add Human Readable Characters on page 171 e Font Family Style and Size on page 172 e Vertical Offset on page 173 Additional Parameters e Bar Width Reduction on page 174 e Device Compensation on page 174 e Magnification on page 174 e Height on page 175 e Snap Bars to Output Resolution on page 178 e Box on page 181 ITF 14 About this Barcode ITF 14 is a standardized version of the Interleaved 2 of 5 barcode containing 14 digits the last being a check digit 151 ESKO NEM OOO000000000000 Parameters General Parameters e Rotation on page 170 e Code on page 170 Text Parameters e Add Human Readable Characters on page 171 e Font Family Style and Size on page 172 e Vertical Offset on page 173 Additional Parameters e Text Format on page 174 e Bar Width Reduction on page 174 e Device Compensation on page 174 e Magnification on page 174 e Height on page 175 e Snap Bars to Output Resolution on page 178 e Total Height on page 180 e Smax Smin on page 180 e Box on page 181 bp o About this Barcode ITF 16 is a standardized versi
272. t is equivalent to a curve adjustment To determine this curve the Flexo Print Preview will use the First dot and the Dot gain in highlights settings from the Press Settings see Define Press Settings on page 282 Going from light to dark e The Flexo Print Preview will display percentages below the First visible dot percentage as 0 e The First visible dot percentage will be shown using the First Dot Prints as percentage e Percentages above the First visible dot percentage will be shown darker e Towards the midtones this darkening effect will fade out until the Range value e Percentages above the Range value are displayed unchanged 14 4 6 Registration Error The Registration Error Preview is a simulation of a design printed with registration errors of a specific press defined in the Press Settings see Define Press Settings on page 282 It can be very helpful to see if trapping is applied sufficiently and correctly The Registration Error value is taken from the Press Setting you selected The separations are randomly shifted In fact all separations are moved exactly the distance of the Registration Error but all under a random angle If you want to see another random registration error simulation click the Simulate Again button 293 14 ESKOOG DeskPack Advanced In the example above you can see a small area of a job in regular preview left and with registration errors right In this case you can clearly s
273. tations regarding the use or the results of the use of the software or the information contained herein Esko Software BVBA shall not be liable for any direct indirect consequential or incidental damages arising out of the use or inability to use the software or the information contained herein The information contained herein is subject to change without notice Revisions may be issued from time to time to advise of such changes and or additions No part of this document may be reproduced stored in a data base or retrieval system or published in any form or in any way electronically mechanically by print photoprint microfilm or any other means without prior written permission from Esko Software BVBA This document supersedes all previous dated versions PANTONE PantoneLIVE and other Pantone trademarks are the property of Pantone LLC All other trademarks or registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners Pantone is a wholly owned subsidiary of X Rite Incorporated 9 Pantone LLC 2015 All rights reserved This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group Portions of this software are copyright 9 1996 2002 The FreeType Project www freetype org All rights reserved Portions of this software are copyright 2006 Feeling Software copyright 2005 2006 Autodesk Media Entertainment Portions of this software are copyright 91998 2003 Daniel Veillard All rights reserved Portions of this
274. te appears WHITE UNDERPRINT Offset mm Miter Limit 4 V Only Visible Parts Gradients Min Density None Subtract 305 Ig SKO6 DDeskPack Advanced 15 3 Adding and Removing White Underprint White Underprint objects will be created in a top level White Underprint layer and will be put in overprint A new White Underprint layer will be created A c N If a different White Underprint ink is used If the White Underprint layer doesn t exist yet If the White Underprint layer was locked hidden or no longer positioned as top layer Click Window Esko White Underprint to open the White Underprint palette Select one or more objects in the Illustrator document Set the White Underprint settings see White Underprint settings on page 306 In the White Underprint palette e Click Add to add White Underprint for the selected artwork the plug in will compute the union of the selected artwork and add the resulting paths at the top of the White Underprint layer e Click Subtract to subtract the selected artwork from the White Underprint layer The plug in will compute the union of the selected artwork and put the resulting paths at the top of the White Underprint layer in overprint and at 096 of the selected White Underprint ink Note If you want the White Underprint to be slightly bigger than the original objects you should use a spread an outward offset when adding to the Whit
275. ted 295 14 S K Q X DeskPack Advanced e Low A low resolution preview image lt 72dpi will be used if present When such preview image is not available a gray box will be displayed e High A preview image of at least 150dpi will be used When such preview image is not available a gray box will be displayed This is the default option e Very High If sufficient memory is available the real data not subsampled of the image will be displayed When the image is too large to fit into memory typically if the size is larger than 64MB a high resolution display image will be shown Anti Aliasing This preference offers control over the Anti Aliasing method used to prevent display artifacts like rough blocky edges in rendered artwork Following settings are available e Off Do not perform any anti aliasing default value fastest e Low Some anti aliasing slower e High Highly accuracte anti aliasing slowest Note Setting Anti Aliasing to High will result in high quality preview at the expense of significantly slower rendering viewing speed up to ten times slower than when Anti Aliasing is turned off It is advised to only use the High setting on fast workstations Macintosh with a 1 8 Ghz G5 processor or higher Densitometer Mode This option lets you select the preferred resolution of the densitometer Following options are offered e Exact Ink densities will be measured with an ac
276. ter based on the attributes of the objects in the Illustrator document Select By Attribute is both a productivity and a QA tool It allows you to quickly select all elements in the file or sub select within a selection that comply with your criteria color object type appearance and even the shape of the object Use it as a QA tool to trace elements in your document that are outside the printing specifications Small text thin lines Click Select gt Esko gt Select By Attributes to open the Select By Attributes palette Why Select by Attributes By combining multiple selection criteria in the Select by Attributes panel you can create your own special tailor made selection filter gt Object Type General Attributes Fill and Stroke gt Appearance gt Color Deselect E Refine m E Select E Collect The Select By Attributes option comes with four buttons Select Refine Deselect and Collect e Select Select all objects in the document that match the criteria that are currently selected e Refine Refine the current selection by adding additional selection criteria This allows you to quickly fine tune your result e Deselect Deselect all objects that match the new selection criteria within the current selection e Collect Make a Collection of all the objects in the document that match the criteria that are curently selected See Collection on page 79 Selection groups The following
277. ters e Rotation on page 170 e Code on page 170 Additional Parameters e Bar Width Reduction on page 174 e Device Compensation on page 174 e Cell Size on page 179 e Wiath Total Height on page 180 e Box on page 181 Specific Parameters Minimum Symbol Size Choose the number of cells to use for your barcode in the format horizontal cells x vertical cells Note If the number of cells you choose for your symbol is too small to encode the data you entered in Code Dynamic Barcodes will use a bigger symbol size automatically Error Correction Error correction adds check sums to the barcode to detect and correct incorrect data You can choose one of the following Error correction levels e Level L 7 of codewords can be restored e evel M 15 of codewords can be restored e Level Q 25 of codewords can be restored e Level H 30 of codewords can be restored Note Keep in mind that a higher correction level makes the barcode bigger as more check sums are added to the barcode and may limit the maximum length of the encoded data Width Height The Width and Height parameters depend on the Cell Size and the number of cells used for the symbol Minimum Symbol Size For example a symbol of 15 x 15 cells where each cell is 2 mm gives a Width and Height of 30 x 30 mm SICK Code About this Barcode SICK is a bar code used in the German packaging industry It s a binary bar code using a thick bar for a 0 and a thin bar for
278. th in contrast the Adobe Illustrator Selection tool will select an object if the Selection tool touches or is drawn through an object With the boostX Area Select tool objects cannot be moved inadvertently eoo m D Selection Tao Ll Move Structural Design alAia Lae q bx SelectTool ee bX Dust Tool Mm vw DeskPack Advanced n k kQ Je x P 4 Yd To use the boostX Select tool Choose Window Tools Hold down the mouse button to show the Selection options gt boostX Select Tool Create a Marquee Selection box around the object or objects you wish to select The selection is highlighted Tip Holding down the Option key while making a boostX marquee selection rotates the selection from the point of marquee origin Holding down the Shift key will snap rotate the marquee selection in 45 degree increments Tip Use shortcut v to switch to Illustrator select tool To use the boostX DirectSelect tool Hold down the mouse button to show the Direct Selection options boostX Direct Select Tool Create a Marquee Selection box around an object s compound path or individual objects within a Group of objects The selection is highlighted f1 ESKO NEM 2 The boostX Area Direct Select tool allows you to marquee select objects and then edit or modify the object s compound path as in the inside of a donut like object The boostX DirectSelect tool also
279. the Preview line 4 Click OK when you are satisfied Repeating the Format for All Items If the field you want to use can have several values e g Fonts Ink Names Placed Files you can put them all in one dynamic object You can also set the same format for all those values at once After choosing an existing format or defining a custom one 1 Select Repeat format for all items 2 Choose the Separator you want to use between the values Comma Space 209 ES E S KO x DeskPack Advanced Insert Field Show Local Variables HH Category Field Barcodes File Name Date amp Time Fonts Document Layer Names File Info XMP CMYK Profile Inks RGB Profile Job Automation Engine Color Mode Links Trim Box Product Automation Engine Media Box System Art Box Format 1 Ivi Repeat format for all items Separator Com ma Space Preview HelveticaNeue Bold HelvericaNeue Roman Dash New line Slash Cancel OK Note You can also specify your own separator by typing it directly in the Separator list Separator amp l 7 Preview HelveticaNeue Bold amp HelveticaNeue Roman 3 When you are satisfied with what you see in the Preview click OK Reflow text If you create a custom mark based on text in a text frame resizing using standard transform tools will resize the text as is instead of reflowing the text inside the resized text box 210 DeskPack Advanced ES w Te
280. the barcode to its minimum required height Messages x O Height of the symbol should be at least 15 of the symbols length or 6 35 mm 0 25 in whichever is greater Dynamic Barcodes 11 18 11 Bars and Digits For e EAN8 amp 13 e HIBC 128 and 39 e M S 7 and Marks amp Spencer s e NDC HRI e UPC A and UPC E For the bar codes listed above the height you enter is the combined height of the bars and the human readable characters Your barcode needs to be tall enough to be read easily by barcode scanners Attention Do not change the Height of the barcode before entering a Magnification value The Height will change again according to the Magnification factor you define Characters per unit This parameter allows you to define your barcode s width based on the encoding of numeric or alphanumeric characters You can choose the unit to use micron mil milliinches mm or inch For example choose mm and use 1 Character per unit in the Dynamic Barcodes dialog if you want the bars needed to encode one character to take up 1 mm 175 DDeskPack Advanced Increase the Characters per unit value to make the barcode narrower or decrease it to make the barcode wider For example if you choose 0 5 Character per unit the bars needed to encode one character will take up 2 mm Note Barcodes like Interleaved 2 of 5 encode two characters together in a group of black and white bars For these barcodes Dynamic Barcod
281. the ink you wish to search for and click the Select button It is possible to select more than one ink at a time Bl Convert to Other To convert a selected ink from your document Ink list to another ink click Convert to other More than one ink can be selected at a time Note Converting an ink will affect only line art However if you have the Channel Mapping or Color Engine plug in installed and licensed converting an ink will also result in the corresponding channel mapping for all images See the Channel Mapping documentation for more information E Convert to CMYK To convert a selected opot Color from your document Ink list to a Process Color Mix CMYK click Convert to CMYK More than one ink can be selected at a time Note Convert to Other and Convert to CMYK are only available if you have a license for boostX Channel Mapping or Color Engine Plugin 3 4 2 Ink Options 22 DeskPack Advanced Ink Options Ink Name PANTONE Bright Green C Ink Group spot Ink Cancel Ink Book EI PANTONE solid Coated mmn a Ink Type Normal m s Ruling 120 LPI Angle 45 Dotshape None Printing Method Unknown Save printing method to presets P il Double click an Ink from the list to open the associated Ink Options dialog There you can specify the Ink Type Lineature Angle and Dotshape of the selected ink The Ink Book dropdown contains all Ink Books that have the current ink
282. the usage of the code set B precede your data with the b control character To obtain an optimal utilization of the code sets A and B but prevent the usage of the space saving code set C use the Code 128 long barcode type instead TRE Coo Parameters General Parameters e Rotation on page 170 e Code on page 170 Text Parameters e Add Human Readable Characters on page 171 e Light Margin Indicator on page 172 e Font Family Style and Size on page 172 e Alignment on page 173 DeskPack Advanced e Vertical Offset on page 173 Additional Parameters e Bar Width Reduction on page 174 e Device Compensation on page 174 e Height on page 175 e Characters per unit on page 175 e Narrow Bar on page 177 e Snap Bars to Output Resolution on page 178 e Box on page 181 Code 128 long About this Barcode Code 128 long is a version of Code 128 that doesn t use the space saving C character set This makes Code 128 long barcodes generally longer NL Parameters General Parameters e Rotation on page 170 e Code on page 170 Text Parameters e Add Human Readable Characters on page 171 e ight Margin Indicator on page 172 e Font Family Style and Size on page 172 e Alignment on page 173 e Vertical Offset on page 173 Additional Parameters e Bar Width Reduction on page 174 e Device Compensation on page 174 e Height on page 175 e Characters per unit on page 175 e Narrow Bar on page 177 e Snap Bars to Output Resolution on p
283. ther countries SolidWorks is a registered trademark of SolidWorks Corporation Ego rm Skoo LDeskPack Advanced Portions of this software are owned by Spatial Corp 1986 2003 All Rights Reserved JDF and the JDF logo are trademarks of the CIP4 Organisation Copyright 2001 The International Cooperation for the Integration of Processes in Prepress Press and Postpress CIP4 All rights reserved The Esko software contains the RSA Data Security Inc MD5 Message Digest Algorithm Java and all Java based trademarks and logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems in the U S and other countries Part of this software uses technology by BestTM Color Technology EFI EFI and Bestcolor are registered trademarks of Electronics For Imaging GmbH in the U S Patent and Trademark Office Contains PowerNest library Copyrighted and Licensed by Alma 2005 2007 All other product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners Correspondence regarding this publication should be forwarded to Esko Software BVBA Kortrijksesteenweg 1095 B 9051 Gent info eur esko com 12 2 Ihe Preflight for Illustrator Concept 12 2 1 What is Preflight for Illustrator Preflight for Illustrator is a plug in designed to evaluate the contents of your Adobe Illustrator document by comparing each object attribute to a user defined set of design or print specifications After checking Preflight for Illu
284. these parameters to define the width of the printability gauges H marks either side of your barcode Smax defines the width of the left H Smin defines the width of the right H Enter 0 in both fields if you don t want printability gauges In the example below the top barcode has a value of 0 for both Smax and Smin the middle one has a value of 4 and the bottom one has a value of 8 the maximum DeskPack Advanced Use this parameter to create an opaque white box under your barcode Note For ITF UCP and PDF417 bar codes the box will be transparent with bearer bars around it Box Use the Top Bottom Left and Right fields to add a white margin around your barcode and make the box bigger 181 ESKO NEM By default Dynamic Barcodes links the four margins values so that when you change one of them the other ones are updated automatically ra Box Top 1 mm Left 1 mm ez Bottom 1 mm Right 1 mm If you want to change them independently click the link symbol to make it look detached d f amp Barcode Parameters trom the Job Folder 182 Automation Engine stores information related to the printing jobs within the Job Folder Each Job Folder can hold various job related technical information including barcode parameters The following barcode parameters can be set in Automation Engine Pilot Type The type of barcode You can t have two different bar codes of the same type in one j
285. tings made here are saved in the Esko XMP Document Information 3 9 1 Distortion The vertical and horizontal distortion value is saved with the document and used by Esko RIPs when generating the final output It allows to compensate for distortions in certain printing methods e g flexography On mounting a flexo plate on the press it is stretched out in one direction By making the output slightly smaller than needed e g 9596 we compensate for this distortion Values for vertical and horizontal distortion is limited to 9096 11096 3 9 2 Screen Registration The Screen Registration parameter allows to choose if the RIP should reset the screening origin for every one up e or keep the same screening origin for the complete document Below a schematic representation of a Repetition with left and without right resetting the screen origin for every one up 66 e DDeskPack Advanced wwwwwww esccse0409 0090 ecccc00000 esccesg05000 ec00000000 m ww ww ww ww wr o000000001 0000000001 0o000000001 oc0000000 HERAT HUE 67 ESKO scooters 4 DOOSUX 4 1 Copyright Notice 68 Copyright 2015 Esko Software BVBA Gent Belgium All rights reserved This material information and instructions for use contained herein are the property of Esko Software BVBA The material information and instructions are provided on an AS IS basis without warranty of any kind
286. top of the original objects fixing all Thin Part occurrences 4 In the Select By Attribute palette select Thin Parts in the Object Type section 5 Click the Collect button 6 In the Collection palette browse through all fixes and correct or delete them as necessary 12 8 2 Fix Thin Parts tool aa ea You can use the Thin Part Tool to interactive create fixes 1 Open the Thin Parts window enter the desired Threshold and click Collect 2 In the Collect palette browse through the Thin Parts and check the suggested fixes 3 Select the Fix Thin Part tool A 4 Click the Thin Parts you want to fix DeskPack Advanced The Fix Thin Parts function will create objects as shown in the Collection immediately on top of the original object Thin Part fixes created with the Fix Thin Part tool can also be selected using Select By Attribute See Select by Attributes on page 75 12 8 3 Thin Parts settings Threshold the minimum width below which parts of objects are shown as a Thin Part occurence Between thick parts H If this option is chosen all thin parts will be flagged In the example underneath the result on top H If this option is enabled parts of objects are only flagged as Thin Parts if the thin part is in between two parts of the object above the Threshold In the example below the result shown at the bottom Suggest Fixes in the Fly out menu If this option is enabled Thin Parts will show the s
287. trademarks and logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems in the U S and other countries Part of this software uses technology by BestTM Color Technology EFI EFI and Bestcolor are registered trademarks of Electronics For Imaging GmbH in the U S Patent and Trademark Office Contains PowerNest library Copyrighted and Licensed by Alma 2005 2007 All other product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners Correspondence regarding this publication should be forwarded to Esko Software BVBA Kortrijksesteenweg 1095 B 9051 Gent info eur esko com 6 2 Introduction The Color Engine Plugin allows to add or replace inks using the Color Engine Ink Books Color Engine Plugin can only use a Server License on an Automation Engine Server 6 3 Adding an ink from Ink Book To add an Ink from an Esko Ink Book 1 Open the Add Ink from Ink Book dialog by selecting Window gt Esko gt Color Engine gt Add Ink From Ink Book 105 ES E S K O x DeskPack Advanced 106 4 9 6 Choose From PANTONE Colors Coated Hd Qa Page 1 Page 2 Page 3 Page 4 Page 5 Yellow Purple Process Yellow Hexachrome Yellow 100 Yellow O12 Violet Process Magenta Hexachrome Orange 101 Orange 021 Blue OF 2 Process Cyan Hexachrome Magenta 102 Warm Red Reflex Blue Process Black Hexachrome Cyan Yellow Red 032 Process Blue Trans White Hexachrome Green 103 r1 e JL a 234 A Add jJ f Done
288. tware are copyright 91998 2003 Daniel Veillard All rights reserved Portions of this software are copyright 91999 2006 The Botan Project All rights reserved Part of the software embedded in this product is gSOAP software Portions created by gSOAP are Copyright 92001 2004 Robert A van Engelen Genivia inc All rights reserved Portions of this software are copyright 91998 2008 The OpenSSL Project and 1995 1998 Eric Young eayQcryptsoft com All rights reserved This product includes software developed by the Apache Software Foundation http www apache org Adobe the Adobe logo Acrobat the Acrobat logo Adobe Creative Suite Illustrator InDesign PDF Photoshop PostScript XMP and the Powered by XMP logo are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and or other countries Microsoft and the Microsoft logo are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries SolidWorks is a registered trademark of SolidWorks Corporation DeskPack Advanced E Portions of this software are owned by Spatial Corp 1986 2003 All Rights Reserved JDF and the JDF logo are trademarks of the CIP4 Organisation Copyright 2001 The International Cooperation for the Integration of Processes in Prepress Press and Postpress CIP4 All rights reserved The Esko software contains the RSA Data Security Inc MD5 Message Digest Algorithm Java and all Java based
289. u can enter different values for vertical and horizontal offset If an offset of Omm is used in the image underneath on the left the bounding box of the corner mark is placed on the outside of the selected page box The page box is shown in red the corner mark in black and the bounding box in blue In the image on the right the default offset of 8mm is used You can see the Corner Mark being moved 8 mm to the inside based on the original position Since the default symbol is 10 mm by 10mm this default setting places the corner mark at 2 mm to the outside of the selected page box Color Patch Properties Color Patch marks are created from a symbol named ColorPatch DeskPack Advanced ES Dynamic Marks Properties z Position and Shape Attach ta Trim Box HH 73 929 mm HEV12 141 mm Set Symbol 7 Color and Inks Index O OZ L O St Inks Stroke Color 5ame as Fill Text Field 1 Text Color 5ame as Fill Short Ink Name Insert Modify Set Symbol allows to change the symbol used for the Color Patch Mark See Changing the Symbol on page 201 A Color Patch mark is dynamically colored in one ink The Index defines the ink to use based on the ink position in the Ink Manager You can however define a different color for the text and for the stroke The number of text fields depends on the number of text fields in the symbol When using the default symbol a Color Pat
290. uggested fix instead of just highlighting the Thin Part itself Show Centerline in the Fly out menu If this option is enabled the centerline of the thin part is shown 2o 12 S K Q X DeskPack Advanced 12 9 he Font List 12 9 1 Why would you use font classification 3 Some font families are less printable than others when it comes to small font sizes Serif fonts like e g Times Roman have small decorative extensions at corners or extremities of each character These extensions tend to disappear or fade in print when using extremely small font sizes Not every printing process suffers equally from this phenomenon The bold font family members on the other hand facilitate the printing of small thus allowing smaller font sizes than normal typefaces The information on which characteristics a specific typeface has is not consistently stored in the fontdata making it impossible to automatically detect the nature of the font The font list menu brings a solution to this allowing the user to manually classify typefaces This may seem to be a tedious job at first but after initial classification the font database can gradually be updated when more fonts are added However this classification is not compulsory If there is no need to distinguish between bold serif and normal fonts in the workflow assigning a minimum value for normal fonts only will work in most cases every type instance will be compared to this value
291. ument Furthermore Esko Software BVBA does not warrant guarantee or make any representations regarding the use or the results of the use of the software or the information contained herein Esko Software BVBA shall not be liable for any direct indirect consequential or incidental damages arising out of the use or inability to use the software or the information contained herein The information contained herein is subject to change without notice Revisions may be issued from time to time to advise of such changes and or additions No part of this document may be reproduced stored in a data base or retrieval system or published in any form or in any way electronically mechanically by print photoprint microfilm or any other means without prior written permission from Esko Software BVBA This document supersedes all previous dated versions PANTONE PantoneLIVE and other Pantone trademarks are the property of Pantone LLC All other trademarks or registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners Pantone is a wholly owned subsidiary of X Rite Incorporated 9 Pantone LLC 2015 All rights reserved This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group Portions of this software are copyright 9 1996 2002 The FreeType Project www freetype org All rights reserved Portions of this software are copyright 2006 Feeling Software copyright 2005 2006 Autodesk Media Entertainment Portions of this sof
292. ument Setup d B OPen Recent Files T 3 GaelicGhost 6pack ard 150 CM Browse in Bridge Share My Screen Device Central Close W Save 885 Save As 1t 385 Save a Copy dS Save as Template Check In Save for Web amp Devices i365 Revert F12 Place Place File Save for Microsoft Office D Bad n Export Show in Finder Open In Visualizer Update Scripts f Document Setup AP Artist Document Color Mode ME DD DU D 0ELL XAALL EskoArtwork XMP File Info X 1 881 Print AF Export Selected Objects to ArtiosCAD File ArtiosCAD Export adds the item Export Selected Objects to ArtiosCAD File to the Structural Design menu Only ARD files can be included when exporting to a new ArtiosCAD file 41 3 LDeskPack Advanced or Edit Object Type Select Effect View Window Help New AN New from Template 38N Open go m Opacity 100 x E ja x Open Recent Files p Tu Untitled 1 300 CMYK Pr Browse in Bridge X 380 Share My Screen Device Central Close AW Save 885 Save As 1t 385 Save a Copy dS Save as Template Check In Save for Web amp Devices X1 385 Place Structural Design Ir Place File ae Place from Shapes Save for Microsoft Office Open from Shapes Export Open In Visualizer Scripts b Document Setup d Export Selected Objects to ArtiosCAD File Document C
293. up click the X in the top right corner This doesn t affect the note itself it only hides the pop up DeskPack Advanced 12 Preflight 12 1 Copyright Notice Copyright 2015 Esko Software BVBA Gent Belgium All rights reserved This material information and instructions for use contained herein are the property of Esko Software BVBA The material information and instructions are provided on an AS IS basis without warranty of any kind There are no warranties granted or extended by this document Furthermore Esko Software BVBA does not warrant guarantee or make any representations regarding the use or the results of the use of the software or the information contained herein Esko Software BVBA shall not be liable for any direct indirect consequential or incidental damages arising out of the use or inability to use the software or the information contained herein The information contained herein is subject to change without notice Revisions may be issued from time to time to advise of such changes and or additions No part of this document may be reproduced stored in a data base or retrieval system or published in any form or in any way electronically mechanically by print photoprint microfilm or any other means without prior written permission from Esko Software BVBA This document supersedes all previous dated versions PANTONE PantoneLIVE and other Pantone trademarks are the property of Pantone LLC All other trade
294. ural design layer names correctly even if you are for example opening a German text encoded ARD file on a Chinese system For ARD files written by older versions of ArtiosCAD the plug in will use your Current language settings for text encoding In most cases it makes sense to click this option Current language settings If this option is selected the plug in will always use the text encoding of your system instead of the encoding that might be specified in the structural design file 39 ESKO NEM Other You can specify directly which text encoding should be used In the example of a German ARD file that is opened on a Chinese system you should switch the text encoding to Western European Windows Latin 1 If you click OK the layer palette will be refreshed using the new text encoding For the example above the layer palette shows 3 5 3 Structural Design Export AO structural Design Save as The Structural Design Save as saves a copy of the linked Structural Design file which is placed in the Illustrator file to a new location The Illustrator file will link to the newly saved Structural Design file Choose File gt Structural Design gt Save as 3 LDeskPack Advanced or Edit Object Type Select Effect View Window Help New AN New from Template DEN E Open wo rle Opacity 100 E Doc
295. urrently browsed object e Select the Select option to automatically select the currently browsed object Note Selecting or deselecting objects doesn t change the collection You can still select and or edit objects without loosing your collection 12 7 1 Modifying a Collection You can modify the Collection using one of the functions in the fly out menu of the Collection palette e Click the Make New Collection button or select Make Collection from the fly out menu to forget the current collection and create a new collection based on the current selection e Select Clear Collection from the fly out menu to forget the current collection e Select one or more objects in the job and select Add Selection from the fly out menu to add the selected objects to the collection e Browse to an object in the collection and select Remove Selection from the fly out menu to remove the selected objects from the collection Note Objects that are removed in the job are automatically removed from the collection e Select Select All from the fly out menu to select all objects in the collection 2 0 12 LDeskPack Advanced 12 5 Thin parts The Thin Parts function allows to search for areas where objects are thinner than a given minimum width The Thin parts dialog can be opened by selecting Window gt Esko gt Preflight gt Thin Parts THIN PARTS Threshold 0 35 mm oH oH Collect jf Fix Clicking the Collect button
296. utomation Engine or FlexRip environment it is recommended to write exported files to the Automation Engine container 9 3 2 Export of all images in the document 1 In the menu select Window gt Esko gt Image Extractor gt Export All Images The engine of Image Extractor for Illustrator goes through the whole document and collects all images The dialog Export All Images appears Export All Images Images found 1 Folder Users mazo Desktop Browse File Name starts with picture File Format Y DCS2 0 Photoshop DCS2 0 Esko CT w TIFF Cancel ok The number of images that will be exported is indicated at the top Folder specifies to which directory the images should be written File Name starts with specifies the prefix of each exported image The name of each image is created with the prefix and order in the export File Format indicates the format in wich the image s will be exported Only formats that can store every image in the document are displayed 224 DeskPack Advanced ES 3060 Choose the Output Folder O Subfolder Cl a oo FAVORITES 1 mazo pO Applications DeskPack LJ DevTrack D TestLink 5 Documents 73 Instalator Suite10 lAP as Eg 416 LJ Receipts New Folder Cancel Open 2 After exporting the images the directory may contain following files e g c picture_O ct c picture_1 ct c picture_2 ct c picture_3 ct O 4
297. ve a rule click Consider again this example URI file name file ImageServer LOWRES images lowres tests Spacebar CMYK eps The condition Extension Is Equal To EPS will match Folder Name Starts With lowres will match You can specify the text ending with to state that it must be the entire Folder name and to make sure that directories starting with for example lowres plus will not match Server Name Is Equal To imageserver will also match as the case is not compared When you use more than one condition in a rule the Replace 1st Matching Part Of Path and Replace 2nd Part Of Matching Path changes become effective Consider this file file Serv SharedImg LORESIMAGES ANIMALS LOWRES myimage eps with conditions of Folder Name Contains LORESIMAGES and Folder Name Contains LOWRES 19 ESKO NEM 20 e and changes of Replace 1st Matching Part Of Path HIGHRESIMAGES and Replace 2nd Part Of Matching Path HIGHRES The first change will replace LOWRESIMAGES with HIGHRESIMAGES since it was first and the second change will replace LOWRES with HIGHRES Notes and Restrictions To copy the OPI settings between computers so they all are the same copy AE10 OPISettings prefs In Windows that file can beat C Documents and Settings username AppData Roaming Adobe Adobe Illustrator CSx Settings but its exact location depends on the type of login local or domain and Illustrator version CSx where x is a numb
298. w will zoom in using the clicked point as center point To zoom out click while holding the ALT key pressed and the view will zoom out using the clicked point as center point You can also drag a rectangle to zoom in and the new viewport will be a closest match to the rectangle you dragged To pan the view hold down the spacebar and drag a line in the preview pane The view will move the direction and the length of the line you drag 14 LDeskPack Advanced Note You can minimalize the user interface by selecting Hide options from the dropdown menu Press Settings E Show Options Viewer EN amp Y FOUR MEAL WITH A QUICK amp TASTEFULEL ITALIAN uE m Hide Trapping Layer s ef Hide Trapping Layer s since P gg Merge Similar Inks e B Show All Separations L v Show Technical Inks e ea 14 4 Ihe Viewer window 14 4 1 Viewing options Options particular to certain Viewer previews are grouped under View Options You can expand or collapse them using the triangle beside View Options The following options are available in all Previews Separation visibility In the Ink list you can e Click the eye icon in front of a separation color name to show or hide it e Alt click an eye button to quickly hide all other separations and go in single separation mode Alt click the same eye button again to show all separations Note If Show
299. wing s ruler origin is aligned to the Crosshair origin point Note In Adobe Illustrator C85 and CS5 5 only Global Rulers can be aligned to the Crosshair position If you are using Artboard rulers you need to change them first to Global Rulers Working with Crosshair alignment tools To interactively position the Crosshair otart using the Crosshair tool by clicking the tool in the default toolbox The first time you select the Crosshair tool the blue guide lines will align to the 0 0 Ruler origin The Crosshair Guides can be positioned using the mouse to set the Crosshair origin point Hold down the Option key and mouse button to set the angle of the Crosshair guide lines Hold down the Option key the Shift key and the mouse button to rotate and Snap the Crosshair Guide lines to 45 degree increments Aligning the Crosshair Guide lines to selected objects To align the Crosshair Guide lines to selected objects 1 Select the objects to align to 2 Click the Align Crosshair button DeskPack Advanced 3 Select All Directions Align Vertical or Align Horizontal to create the alignment configuration you desire Clicking one of the 9 crosshair alignment buttons will align the Crosshair guides to the selected objects while maintaining the Crosshair angle You can use Crosshair alignment tools to change the angle As such you obtain a reference to align objects to or just to get an accurate readout on the objects used as a
300. with angle 7 5 and dgc_1 dgc screen A with angle 8 5 will jump to the nearest available angle thus becomes screen A with angle 7 5 and dgc 2 dgc Result Object A and object B will both be ripped with screen A and angle 7 5 but with different DGC s 19 4 Added features of the InkKManager table 280 e Each ink can visualize all the technical parameters ruling angle dotshape it contains Note that you are free to enter a name of your own choosing for dotshape e For each ink each specific technical parameter can be selected and edited via the InkManager dialog by double clicking the specific ink 13 LDeskPack Advanced Ink Options Ink Name Process Black Ink Group Process Ink f Eaned Ruling 120 LPI Angle 25 Dotshape Circular Euclidean C Printing Method Unknownl 0 Save printing method to presets e You can select all the objects that use the specific ink or specific ink parameters by the Select Art Using Ink button Li 201 IE ESKOOG DDeskPack Advanced 14 Viewer 14 1 Welcome to Viewer 14 2 Benefits of using Viewer Viewer is a very accurate separation viewer with a lot of extra production tools It eliminates the need for separated proofs and will help you to avoid bad plate making You can preview the separations of your document as they would be produced by exporting the document using Launch Workflow and rasterizing it on an Esko FlexRip Note
301. with a combined installation there are new features in the updated plug ins e Support for OPI Open Press Interface server mapping in PDF Export e A combined Preferences dialog for PDF Export and TrimBox MediaBox that also works with Shuttle and Launch Task in client server configurations e The ability to always save or not save XMP data in Illustrator documents when you save them e Esko Document Setup 3 2 1 Data Exchange Preferences TZ Update XMP on Document Save directly on the Preferences gt Esko menu controls if the document s XMP data is updated when the document is saved in the Al format or as Adobe PDF with preserved Illustrator editing capabilities and is turned on by default Deselecting this option results in slightly faster document saves 3 LDeskPack Advanced 3 3 The PDF Export Plug In 3 3 1 Introduction The PDF Export plug in allows you to directly export your Illustrator files to the Normalized PDF format The Normalized PDF format contains all the Esko metadata necessary to ensure compatibility with your Esko workflow e list of linked images e barcode information e placed CAD graphics metadata e inks information and other document properties 3 3 2 Saving a File as Normalized PDF To save your Illustrator file as Normalized PDF using PDF Export 1 Goto File gt Export 2 In the dialog that opens choose your file s name and location and choose the Normalized PDF pdf
302. xt Text Mark If the Reflow Text option is enabled resizing using standard transform tools will resize the text box and the text will reflow inside the resized text box Text Text Mark ext Mar Barcode Mark properties A Barcode Mark is a Custom Mark created from a Barcode object For more information on creating barcodes please refer to the Dynamic Barcodes documentation 1 Create a barcode using the barcode type and settings you want to use and add it as a Custom Mark For more info on adding obejcts as Mark see Adding objects as Mark on page 190 2 Open the Dynamic Mark Properties palette by choosing Window gt Esko gt Dynamic Marks gt Dynamic Mark Properties The existing Barcode is static which means it won t change when you use the Mark into another document or if the document changes You can make all or part of the code dynamic to have it change with every document you use your mark into PA DDeskPack Advanced Dynamic Marks Properties Position Attach to Trim Box H4 B 35 779 mm 33 632 mm mele m f Static HH Include Technical Inks Barcode 123455670 Insert Modify ll o ail White Underprint White Underprint Ink Settings eae ici 3 To get a dynamic barcode you need to insert dynamic fields Place your cursor where you want the field to be or select the text to replace with a field and click the Insert Mod
303. you choose for your symbol is too small to encode the data you entered in Code Dynamic Barcodes will display an error Messages x x D atamatrix error Data can not be encoded in chosen code type Dynamic Barcodes 14 73 41 e code is too long Dynamic Barcodes 14 23 41 You can choose Best Fit to make Dynamic Barcodes automatically adapt the number of cells to the amount of data you entered in Code Gell Size Enter the size you want to give to each cell of the symbol This affects the size of the whole symbol The unit used is the one you chose as Illustrator s General unit in the Units amp Display Performance Preferences In the example below the first symbol has a 1 mm cell size cells sides are 1 mm and the second one a 2 mm cell size 179 180 DDeskPack Advanced Width Total Height The Width and Total Height parameters depend on the Cell Size and the number of cells used for the symbol Symbol Type In the example below a symbol of 10 x 10 cells where each cell is 3 mm gives a Width and Total Height of 30 x 30 mm Symbol Type 10 by 10 A Cell Size 3 mm Width 30 mm ee Total Height 30 mm Total Height Enter the total height you want to give to your barcode This is the combined height of the bars the human readable characters and the box If your barcode doesn t contain human readable characters or a box the Total Height is the same as the bars Height omax Smin Use

DeskPack Advanced 14.1 User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents